Transcript
CAT.E 901-
Uniaxial Electric Actuator
Uniaxial Electric Actuator Controller Teaching Box
Series LJ1
Series LC1
Series LC1
Series LJ1
Slide screw for horizontal mounting and brake for vertical mounting have been added to the high rigidity linear guide /series LJ1H Dedicated teaching box newly released
Employs a guide with high High positioning accuracy is achi Linear and slider guides with 3 types of feed screws Linear guide
Series LJ1
LJ1H10
Slider guide
H
Series LJ1
LJ1H20, 30
Ball screw
LJ1S10
LJ1S20, 30
Slide screw
Positioning repeatability
S
±0.02mm
Positioning repeatability
±0.1mm
(ground ball screw)
(slide screw)
0.05
± mm (rolled ball screw)
Abundant product variations • Without motor, can be supplied with specified motor • Stepping motor, also compatible with DC motor • Full range of options such as TSUBAKICABLEVEYOR® Note) TSUBAKICABLEVEYOR® is a registered trade mark of the TSUBAKIMOTO CHAIN CO.
Completely flat top surface Improves freedom in mounting of work pieces.
Cable entry is possible from 5 directions Top entry
Left entry
With the slider guide, slide screw type, low drive noise of 47dB or less is possible (LJ1S Series only) Model LJ1SS LJ1HP LJ1HN LJ1HS
IX
IX IY W
H
IY
Right entry
Bottom entry
Noise level (dB)
47 or less 60 or less 61 or less 50 or less
Higher rigidity Higher rigidity has been realized by using an aluminum hollow box structure for the body.
Axial entry
2 types of mounting are possible to improve mounting of the unit. T-slot bottom mount Top mount
Model
LJ1H10 Linear guide LJ1H20 LJ1H30 LJ1S10 Slider guide LJ1S20 LJ1S30
Moment of inertia of area
IX
IY
7 40 84 15 60 177
48 374 836 52 402 1000
W
H
70 122 151 70 122 151
24.7 44.8 55 36 56.3 73.3
(Except LJ1H10/LJ1S10)
Features 1
rigidity and high linear precision.
eved with an AC servomotor and feed screw. Low cost
Table running accuracy C D
Running accuracy Model
LJ1H10 LJ1H20 LJ1H30 LJ1S10 LJ1S20 LJ1S30
C plane to A plane D plane to B plane 0.07 or less 0.07 or less 0.03 or less 0.06 or less 0.09 or less 0.03 or less 0.12 or less 0.015 or less 0.1 or less 0.1 or less 0.1 or less 0.1 or less
The high rigidity direct acting guide costs approximately 30% less than the ball screw type (SMC product comparison). (LJ1S Series only)
B A
Actuator control
Programming from a PC
• Absolute and incremental movement commands are provided.
• Programming and start-up: easy programming is possible by means of the PC software's matrix editor.
Speed and acceleration settings also are unresricted.
• Home position return direction is selectable.
• Program test function: program testing can
Operation from the teaching box • Programming and parameters: can be operated like a PC. (Can perform operation, monitoring, alarm reset, etc.)
be done safely by applying limits to the program. (single step, I/O cancel, override)
• Forced output function (test): forced output operation can be performed without relying on the program. Valid for confirmation of connections and operation.
Program capacity • 127 steps x 8 programs: ensures sufficient program capacity. Linking is possible with jumps and subroutine calls, etc.
Controller with built-in driver • Space saving: size reduction achieved by improved mounting efficiency. Having all top mounting connectors also saves space.
• Light weight 2.2kg: weight reduction achieved by omitting transformer.
Operation from a PLC
Dedicated Controller
Series LC1 General-purpose input/output control
• 2 execute configurations: execution of program batches and step units (movement commands only) can be combined.
• 6 each generalpurpose input/output ports: control of valves and auto switches, etc. is possible with 6 points + 6 points of generalpurpose input/output ports.
• Control input/output terminals are provided. Operation can be controlled from a PLC.
Operation from external input • Can be operated from external input by using a 24V power supply: execution of program batches and step units (movement commands only) can be combined.
Features 2
Series LJ1
Electric Actuator
LJ1H1011
LJ1H
High rigidity direct acting guide
Vertical ∗1)
LJ1H 20
Horizontal
LJ1H 10
Vertical ∗1)
LJ1H2021
LJ1H 30 LJ1H3031
LJ1S 10
LJ1S
Slider guide
LJ1S 20
Ground ball screw ±0.02 Lead 12mm Rolled ball screw Lead 12mm
±0.05
Slide screw Lead 20mm
±0.1
Ground ball screw ±0.02 Lead 8mm Rolled ball screw Lead 8mm
±0.05
Ground ball screw Lead 12mm
±0.02
Rolled ball screw Lead 12mm
±0.05
Ground ball screw Lead 10mm
±0.02
Rolled ball screw Lead 10mm
±0.05
Ground ball screw Lead 20mm
±0.02
Rolled ball screw Lead 20mm
±0.05
Slide screw Lead 20mm
±0.1
Ground ball screw ±0.02 Lead 5mm Rolled ball screw Lead 5mm
Ground ball screw ±0.02 Lead 10mm Rolled ball screw Lead 10mm
±0.05
Ground ball screw Lead 25mm
±0.02
Rolled ball screw Lead 25mm
±0.05
Slide screw Lead 40mm
±0.1
Ground ball screw ±0.02 Lead 10mm Rolled ball screw Lead 10mm
LJ1S LJ1S2021 30
Slide screw Lead 20mm
Slide screw Lead 20mm
Motor output (W)
Stroke (mm) 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1500
600 10
50 500
10
400 100
5
600
30
500
30
1,000
15
500
15
250
8
500
60
1,000
30
500
20
500
5
300
50
10
300
100
20
500
200
100
±0.05
200
±0.05
Slide screw Lead 20mm
Horizontal
LJ1S1011
Feed screw
Positioning repeatability (mm) Maximum work load (kg) Maximum speed (mm/sec)
Typical model
Horizontal
Guide type
Vertical∗1) Horizontal
Series
Mounting position
Series Variations
±0.1
Caution ∗1) Vertical type is equipped with brake.
Since a regenerative absorption unit may be necessary depending on the operating conditions, separate inquiry should be made. ∗2) Consult SMC regarding options.
Features 3
Table of Contents
TSUBAKICABLEVEYOR® is a registered trade mark of the TSUBAKIMOTO CHAIN CO.
Applicable Individual models controller model
Options Cover with CABLEswitch VEYOR® grooves
∗2) Dust seal
Selection Procedure............................................ Feature 5 Basic Configuration Examples ............................Feature 6 Allowable Dynamic Moment ............................... Feature 7, 8 Safety Instructions............................................... P.65
LJ1H101PB-
LC1-1B1H
LJ1H101NBLJ1H101SC-
LC1-1B1M
Actuator Precautions........................................... P.66, 67 Auto Switch Common Precautions...................... P.68, 69 Specific Product Precautions...............................P.70
LJ1H102PH-
K
LJ1H102NH-
K
LJ1H102PB-
K
LJ1H102NB-
K
LC1-1B1V
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide LJ1H Series........P.1 LJ1H10 Series..................................................... P.2~7
LJ1H202PA-
LJ1H20 Series..................................................... P.8~13
LJ1H202NA-
LJ1H30 Series..................................................... P.14~19 LC1-1B2H
LJ1H202PCLJ1H202NC-
Slider Guide
LJ1H202SC-
LC1-1B2M
LJ1S Series......P.21
LJ1S10 Series..................................................... P.22~27 LJ1S20 Series..................................................... P.28~33
LJ1H202PF-
K
LJ1H202NF-
K
LJ1H202PA-
K
Motor Reference Data, Nonstandard Motors ...... P.42~46
LJ1H202NA-
K
Order Made Specifications.................................. P.47
LJ1S30 Series..................................................... P.34~39 LC1-1B2V
Option Specifications........................................... P.40, 41
LJ1H303PD-
LC1-1B3H LJ1H303ND-
Dedicated Controller
LJ1H303SE-
LC1-1B3M
LJ1H303PA-
K
LJ1H303NA-
K
LJ1S101SC-
LC1 Series......P.49
Typical Equipment Configurations ...................... P.50, 51 LC1 Series........................................................... P.52~60
LC1-1B3V
LC1-1B1S
Dedicated Teaching Box LC1 Series......P.61 LC1 Series........................................................... P.61, 62 LC1 Series Options.............................................. P.63 Catalog Terminology........................................... P.64
LJ1S202SC-
LC1-1B2S
LJ1S303SC-
LC1-1B3S
LJ1, LC1 Inquiry Sheet........................................ P.71, 72
Features 4
Series LJ1
Electric Actuator
Selection Procedure Various operating conditions must be considered in order to select an electric actuator. The selection procedure is shown below.
Mounting position
Positioning repeatability
*Vertical
Horizontal
Ground ball screw (±0.02mm)
Rolled ball screw (±0.05mm)
Slide screw (±0.1mm)
Stroke
100 to1500mm
100 to 600mm
Work load
to 60kg
to 20kg
Speed
to 1000mm/s
to 600mm/s
Tentative determination of actuator model
Review of moment
Confirmation of allowable moment
OK
NG
Determination of actuator model ∗ When mounted in a vertical position, selection is limited to ground ball screw and rolled ball screw.
Caution Vertical type is equipped with brake. Since a regenerative absorbtion unit may be necessary depending on the operating conditions, a separate inquiry should be made.
Features 5
Series LJ1
Electric Actuator
Basic Configuration Examples
Teaching box
Dedicated controller
Controller setup software (option)
PC (provided by customer)
Electric actuator
24VDC power supply (provided by customer)
PLC (provided by customer)
Basic configuration 1 Can be operated with the electric actuator, dedicated controller, teaching box and 24VDCNote 1) power supply. Basic configuration 2 Can be operated with the electric actuator, dedicated controller, controller setup software with PC and 24VDC power supply. Can also be operated from a PLCNote 2) or PC for external control. Note 1) Because the contoller uses the emergency stop terminal corresponding to the B contact,
24VDC must be applied between the control terminals STOP and COM or operation will not be possible. See the instruction manual for further details. Note 2) When operating from a PC, the controller setup software (option) is required.
Features 6
Series LJ1
Electric Actuator
Allowable Dynamic Moment The table is subjected to moment in various directions, depending on the work piece load point. Design should be such that the amount of work piece overhang stays within the ranges shown in the graphs below.
Use of graphs
W: Work load (N) L1, L2, L3: Amount of overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm) a: Table acceleration (mm/s²)
3) Confirm the amount of overhang. Operating conditions should be such that the work load and amount of overhang for each component of moment (pitching, yawing, rolling) fall within the ranges shown in the graphs.
M3
Pitching
a
W a L3
M3
4
8
10
L1 mm
L1 mm
L1 mm 6
a=2000 a=3000
1000
0
10
Work load (W) kg
20
a=3000
30
0
400
4
6
8
L2 mm
600
400
L2 mm
600
200
200
0
10
10
Work load (W) kg
20
20
40
60
Work load (W) kg
Work load (W) kg
400
2
a=2000
1000
600
0
a=1000
2000
200
0
30
20
40
60
Work load (W) kg
Work load (W) kg
3000 2000
2000 a=1000
a=1000
2000
1000
a=2000 a=3000 0
2
4
6
8
1000 a=2000 a=3000
10
0
10
Work load (W) kg 600
400
400
a=1000 a=2000 a=3000
0
2
4
6
8
20
1000 a=2000 a=3000 0
30
40
60
600
a=3000 a=2000 200
a=1000
0
10
20
Work load (W) kg
Work load (W) kg
600
200
a=1000
L3 mm
L3
Yawing
W
2
a=1000
L1 mm
M2 W
a=2000 a=3000
1000
LJ1H30
2000
L3 mm
L2
LJ1H20 a=1000
0
L2 mm
Rolling
M2 W
2000
L3 mm
L2
2) Determine the mounting position. Confirm whether mounting is horizontal, lateral or vertical (LJ1H only).
LJ1H10
L1 mm
W
Vertical
M1 L1
Pitching
a
Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Model
L1 mm
Mounting position Direction of load movement
1) Determine the model.
5
Work load (W) kg
10
400
a=1000 a=2000
200
15
a=3000
0
5
10
15
20
Work load (W) kg
Work load (W) kg 600
600
a=1000 200 2
4
6
8
a=2000 a=3000
200
10
0
5
Work load (W) kg
L2
L3
Yawing
M2
W
M3 a
Features 7
L1 mm
L1 mm
10
1
2
3
0
15
4
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
0
300
100
200
4
50
5
0
2
Work load (W) kg 30
4
6
150
10
1
2
3
4
Work load (W) kg
5
100
10
300
50
2
4
6
20
30
a=500 a=1000
a=2000
0
30
Work load (W) kg
a=1000
a=2000
0
0
10
a=500
a=1000
20
100
Work load (W)kg
a=500
20
8
10
Work load (W) kg
150
3
a=3000
100
20
2
a=500
200
Work load (W) kg
10
20
a=2000
a=2000
50
5
15
LJ1S30
30
1
10
300
a=500
Work load (W) kg
0
5
Work load (W) kg
L2 mm
M2 W
a=2000
0
200
a=1000
L2 mm
Rolling
L2
20
a=2000 a=3000
LJ1S20 150
a=500 a=1000
L2 mm
W
LJ1S10 30
L3 mm
M1 L1
Pitching
a
Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Model
L3 mm
Mounting position Direction of load movement
10
a=1000
400
Work load (W) kg
L1 mm
0
L3 mm
L3 mm
a=2000
400
a=1000
400
L3 mm
M1
a=3000
L3 mm
a L1
Vertical
Yawing
600
8
Work load (W) kg
10
200
a=2000
100
0
10
20
Work load (W) kg
30
Electric Actuator
Series
LJ1
Deflection Data
Load point distance
100000 50000
20000 10000 5000
20000 10000 5000
Horizontal load 100% Horizontal load 50%
2000 1000 500 200 100 50
Lateral load 100% Lateral load 50%
20 10 5 2 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 100
Figure 1. Horizontal
Horizontal empty weight deflection Lateral empty weight deflection
300
200
Amount of deflection μm
W
LJ1S10
100000 50000
2000 1000 500 200 100 50
2 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 100
200
300
500
LJ1S20 100000 50000 Horizontal load 100% Horizontal load 50%
20000 10000 5000 2000 1000 500
Amount of deflection μm
Amount of deflection μm
Figure 2. Lateral
Horizontal empty weight deflection Lateral empty weight deflection
Load point distance mm
100000 50000
Lateral load 100% Lateral load 50%
200 100 50 20 10 5 2 1 0.5
20000 10000 5000 2000 1000 500
100
200
300
500
Horizontal load 100% Horizontal load 50%
200 100 50 20 10 5 Lateral load 100% Lateral load 50%
2 1 0.5
Horizontal empty weight deflection Lateral empty weight deflection
0.2 0.1
0.2 0.1 100
1000
Load point distance mm
Horizontal empty weight deflection Lateral empty weight deflection
200
300
500
1000
Load point distance mm
LJ1H30 Amount of deflection μm
Load point distance
Lateral load 100% Lateral load 50%
5
500
LJ1H20 W
Horizontal load 100% Horizontal load 50%
20 10
Load point distance mm
LJ1S30
100000 50000
100000 50000
20000 10000 5000
20000 10000 5000
2000 1000 500
Horizontal load 100% Horizontal load 50%
200 100 50 20 10 5 Lateral load 100% Lateral load 50%
2 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 100
Horizontal empty weight deflection Lateral empty weight deflection
200
300
500
Load point distance mm
1000
Amount of deflection μm
With single end support and table moved to the end of the stroke
LJ1H10 Amount of deflection μm
The load and the amount of deflection at load point W are shown in the graphs below for each series.
2000 1000 500
Horizontal load 100% Horizontal load 50%
200 100 50 20 10 5 Lateral load 100% Lateral load 50%
2 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 100
Horizontal empty weight deflection Lateral empty weight deflection
200
300
500
1000
Load point distance mm
Features 8
Uniaxial Electric Actuator
Series
H
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide
LJ1H10 Series ............................. P 2 LJ1H20 Series .............................. P 8 LJ1H30 Series .............................. P14
1
Uniaxial Electric Actuator
H10 Motor Output: 50/100W
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
How to Order
LJ1 H 10 1 1 N B
100
F 2
Guide type
Cable length
H High rigidity direct acting guide
2 3 4 5
Series 10
Series 10
Motor output 1 2
Cable entry direction
50W 100W
F R L T B
Power supply voltage 1 2
2000mm 3000mm 4000mm 5000mm
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
100/110VAC 50/60Hz 200/220VAC 50/60Hz
Top entry
Brake Nil K
Feed screw type (Refer to Table 1 below for applications.)
P N S
Ground ball screw Rolled ball screw Slide screw
Left entry
None With brake
Stroke (Refer to Table 1 below for applications.)
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Feed screw lead (Refer to Table 1 below for applications.)
H B C
Note)
8mm 12mm 20mm
Axial entry
100mm 200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 700mm 800mm 900mm 1000mm
Bottom entry
Table 1: Feed screw and stroke combinations
Screw combination
Model
LJ1H101PB- Stroke LJ1H101NB- Stroke LJ1H101SC- Stroke LJ1H102PH- Stroke K LJ1H102NH- Stroke K LJ1H102PB- Stroke K LJ1H102NB- Stroke K
Stroke (mm)
100 • • • • • • •
200 • • • • • • •
300 • • • • • • •
400 • • • • • • •
500 • • • • • • •
600
700
800
900
1000
•
•
•
•
•
Please note that combinations other than those shown above cannot be produced.
Caution Note) Units equipped with brakes are for vertical mounting. Since a regenerative absorption unit may be necessary depending on the operating conditions, a separate inquiry should be made.
2
Right entry
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
LJ1H10
Specifications
mm
100
200 300
400
500 600 700
Ball screw
kg
5.2
6.0
6.8
7.5
8.3
800 –
Slide screw
kg
5.3
6.2
7.2
8.0
8.8
9.7 10.5 11.3 12.2 13.0
Stroke Weight
°C
Operating temperature range
Maximum work load
Ball screw
12mm lead
Vertical specification Ball screw
12mm lead
Ball screw Horizontal specification Ball screw
12mm lead
Horizontal specification Slide screw 20mm lead Note)
Maximum speed
Motor output
kg 100W 50W mm/s
10 5
–
10
–
600
– 500
600
–
12mm lead 8mm lead
400
–
Ball screw
12mm lead
74
–
Vertical Ball screw specification
12mm lead
Horizontal specification Slide screw 20mm lead Note)
Positioning repeatability
20mm lead
–
Vertical specification Ball screw
Note)
Rated thrust
8mm lead
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
10
50W
100W 50W N 100W
8mm lead Rolled
Ball screw
Ground
mm
24 150
–
225
–
±0.05
–
±0.02
– ±0.1
Rolled
Slide screw
AC servomotor (50W)
Horizontal specification Vertical specification Note)
AC servomotor (100W)
Encoder Horizontal specification
Ball screw Slide screw
Note)
Vertical specification Ball screw
– ø12mm, 12mm lead
Ground Rolled
–
ø20mm, 20mm lead
Rolled
ø12mm, 12mm lead 8mm lead
Ground
Guide Electromagnetic brake
–
Incremental system Rolled
Feed screw
900 1000
–
High rigidity direct acting guide Deenergized operation type Rated voltage 24V
Specifications Holding torque
Nm
0.4
– – –
Caution Note) Since a regenerative absorption unit may be necessary for vertical specifications, a separate inquiry should be made.
3
Series
LJ1H10
Dimensions Scale: 15% 6
10 80
ø5H10 depth 8
45
Note)
Work piece mounting reference plane 8-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
20 Cable entry side
Note)
5H10 depth 6
Area Z detail 100
Body mounting reference plane
D
60 50
A (table movement range)
Area Z
83
E
90
(F)
(F)
40
C
80 With brake
40 (T-slot pitch)
36
11.5
9.4
B
80
40
10
4.5
45° 3-ø5H10 depth 5
18
30
T-slot dimensions Note)
(mm)
Dimension table/without brake Model
LJ1H101-100 - LJ1H101-200 - LJ1H101-300 - LJ1H101-400 - LJ1H101-500 - LJ1H101 SC-600 - LJ1H101 SC-700 - LJ1H101 SC-800 - LJ1H101 SC-900- LJ1H101 SC-1000-
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
A
B
C
D
E
F
225 325 425 525 625 725 825 925 1025 1125
245 345 445 545 645 745 845 945 1045 1145
460 560 660 760 860 960 1060 1160 1260 1360
201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201 201
192 192 192 192 192 192 192 192 192 192
43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43
100 200 300 400 500
225 325 425 525 625
245 345 445 545 645
507 607 707 807 907
217 217 217 217 217
208 208 208 208 208
74 74 74 74 74
Dimension table/with brake LJ1H102-100K- LJ1H102-200K- LJ1H102-300K- LJ1H102-400K- LJ1H102-500K- Note)
4
Special T-nuts are required to secure the body. The special T-nuts are included with the body unit. Refer to "Options" on page 40 regarding the quantity of T-nuts. The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting equipment.
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
LJ1H10
Construction
!0
!6 t
!5
e
w
y !0 r
!3
i
A
!5
!9
!1
!7!8
q
A'
@2
!4 @0
With brake
u
@1
!2
View A–A'
Parts list/Main parts No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Description AC servomotor Feed screw High rigidity direct acting guide Coupling Bearing R Bearing F Frame A Table Housing A Housing B Top cover
Parts list/Main parts Note Material – 50W/100W – Ball screw/Slide screw – – – – Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy
No.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Description Side cover Housing cover Sensor rail Bumper End cover A End cover B Inner cover Motor cover Auto switch Magnet Brake
Material Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy IIR PC PC PC PC – Rare earth magnet –
Note
5
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
H10 Nonstandard Motor Specifications (Motor Output: 50/100W) Series
How to Order
LJ1 H 10 G 1 1 N B
100
F W X10
Guide type
Note 1)
H High rigidity direct acting guide
X10 Nonstandard motor
Series 10
Limit switch
Series 10
Nil W
Motor specifications G R Y
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yaskawa Electric Corporation
Cable entry direction F R L T B
Motor output 1 2
50W 100W
Nil K
100/115VAC 50/60Hz 200/230VAC 50/60Hz Without motor
Note1) A driver is included when shipped with a nonstandard motor installed. The cable to connect the motor and driver is optional, and may be supplied by the customer, or the cable corresponding to the selected motor may be ordered separately from the section on how to order cables under "Options" on page 40.
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
Brake
Power supply voltage 1 2 0
None B contact specification 2pcs.
Note 2)
None With brake
Stroke (Refer to Table 1 below for applications).
Feed screw type
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
(Refer to Table 1 below for applications).
P N S
Ground ball screw Rolled ball screw Slide screw
Feed screw lead (Refer to Table 1 below for applications).
H B C
8mm 12mm 20mm
100mm 200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 700mm 800mm 900mm 1000mm
Top entry Left entry
Axial entry
Right entry
Bottom entry
Table 1: Feed screw and stroke combinations
Screw combination
Model
LJ1H101PB- Stroke LJ1H101NB- Stroke LJ1H101SC- Stroke LJ1H102PH- Stroke K LJ1H102NH- Stroke K LJ1H102PB- Stroke K LJ1H102NB- Stroke K
Stroke (mm)
100 • • • • • • •
200 • • • • • • •
300 • • • • • • •
400 • • • • • • •
500 • • • • • • •
600
700
800
•
•
•
900 1000
•
Please note that combinations other than those shown above cannot be produced. Refer to page 4 for dimensions.
Caution 6
Note 2) Units equipped with brakes are for vertical mounting. Since a regenerative absorption unit may be necessary depending on the operating conditions, a separate inquiry should be made.
•
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
LJ1H10
Specifications
mm
100
200 300
400
500 600 700
Ball screw
kg
4.8
5.6
6.4
7.1
7.9
800 –
Slide screw
kg
4.9
5.8
6.8
7.6
8.4
9.3 10.1 10.9 11.8 12.6
Stroke Weight (without motor)
°C
Operating temperature range Ball screw 12mm lead
Horizontal specification
Slide screw 20mm lead
Maximum work load Vertical specification
Ball screw
Horizontal specification
Ball screw 12mm lead
Vertical Note 1) specification
12mm lead
Slide screw 20mm lead
Maximum speed
Feed screw
8mm lead
Ball screw Ball screw
Horizontal specification
Slide screw
Note 1)
Vertical specification
Ball screw
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
10
kg 100W
– – – 500
mm/s 100W
8mm lead Rolled
600
–
400
– –
ø12mm, 12mm lead
Ground Rolled
–
ø20mm 20mm lead
Rolled
ø12mm, 12mm lead 8mm lead
Ground
–
High rigidity direct acting guide Specifications Holding torque
Limit switch Note 2)
5 10 600
50W
Guide Electromagnetic brake
–
10
50W
12mm lead
Note 1)
900 1000
Deenergized operation type Rated voltage 24V
–
0.4
–
Nm
Power supply voltage: 4.5 to 28VDC Current consumption: 12mA or less Control output: Open collector, maximum load current 150mA
Specifications
Caution Note 1) Since the maximum work load for vertical specifications is influenced by the regenerative power throughput of the drive, this should be reviewed carefully. Note 2 ) Refer to the drawing below for the internal circuitry of the limit switch.
Nonstandard Compatible Motors: The following motors can be mounted when specified.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Yaskawa Electric Corporation
50 100 50 100 50 100
100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230
D -Y59AL-232 Motor model
MSM5AZP1A MSM011P1A MSM012P1A HC-PQ053 HC-PQ13 SGME-A5BF12 SGME-A5AF12 SGME-01BF12 SGME-01AF12
Compatible driver model
MSD5A1P1E MSD5A3P1E MSD011P1E MSD013P1E MR-C10A1 MR-C10A MR-C10A1 MR-C10A SGDE-A5BP SGDE-A5AP SGDE-01BP SGDE-01AP
+
Brown [Red]
Main switch circuit
Motor output Power supply (W) voltage (AC)
Limit Switch Internal Circuit
Output Black [White]
–
Blue [Black]
∗ Refer to the motor compatibility table on page 42 when specified without motor. ∗ Compatible motors for horizontal operation are 50W only, and for vertical operation 100W only. For the dimensions of the motor mounting area, refer to the dimensions for Series LJ1 H S 10 on page 43. These may be used for reference during design and assembly. ∗ For detailed driver specifications, etc., inquiries should be directed to the respective motor manufacturers.
7
Uniaxial Electric Actuator
H20 Motor Output:100W
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
How to Order
LJ1 H 20 2 1 N A 300
F 2
Guide type H
Cable length
High rigidity direct acting guide
2 3 4 5
Series 20
Series 20
Cable entry direction
Motor output 2
100W
100/110VAC 50/60Hz 200/220VAC 50/60Hz
Ground ball screw Rolled ball screw Slide screw
Note)
None With brake
Nil K
Feed screw type
Left entry
Stroke (Refer to Table 1 below for applications.)
Feed screw lead 5mm 10mm 20mm
Right entry
Axial entry
100mm 200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 700mm 800mm 900mm 1000mm 1200mm
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200
(Refer to Table 1 below for applications.)
F A C
Top entry
Brake
(Refer to Table 1 below for applications.)
P N S
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
F R L T B
Power supply voltage 1 2
2000mm 3000mm 4000mm 5000mm
Bottom entry
Table 1: Feed screw and stroke combinations Model
LJ1H202PA- Stroke Screw combination
LJ1H202NA- Stroke
Stroke (mm)
100 • •
200 • •
300 • •
400 • •
LJ1H202PC- Stroke LJ1H202NC- Stroke LJ1H202SC- Stroke LJ1H202PF- Stroke K LJ1H202NF- Stroke K LJ1H202PA- Stroke K
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
500 • • • • • • • • •
600 • • • • • • • • •
700
800
900
• • •
• • •
• • •
1000 1200
• • •
•
LJ1H202NA- Stroke K Please note that combinations other than those shown above cannot be produced.
Caution Note) Units equipped with brakes are for vertical mounting. Since a regenerative absorption unit may be necessary depending on the operating conditions, a separate inquiry should be made.
8
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
LJ1H20
Specifications
Weight
Maximum work load
Note )
Vertical specification
Maximum speed
Vertical Note ) specification
Rated thrust
7.7
8.9 10.1 11.2 12.6 13.7 14.5 15.3 17.2 18.6
9.0
10.0 11.1 12.2 13.3 14.3 15.3 17.2 19.1 20.6 24.7
°C Ball screw
Ball screw
30
–
15
–
8
–
500
–
1000
– mm/s
–
500
–
5mm lead
360
–
10mm lead
180
–
100W
Nm
–
–
–
90 50 ±0.05
Rolled Ground
±0.02
mm
±0.1
Rolled
AC servomotor (100W)
Horizontal specification Vertical specification
930 740 600 500 500
250
20mm lead
Ball screw
–
15
kg
20mm lead
Slide screw 20mm lead 100W 5mm lead Ball screw 10mm lead
Ball screw
–
30
20mm lead
–
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
10mm lead
Slide screw 20mm lead 100W 5mm lead Ball screw 10mm lead
Slide screw
AC servomotor (100W)
Note )
Incremental system
Encoder Horizontal specification
Ball screw Slide screw
Feed screw Note )
Vertical specification
Ball screw
–
ø15mm, 10mm lead
Rolled Ground
–
ø15mm, 20mm lead
–
ø20mm, 20mm lead
Rolled
ø16mm, 5mm lead ø15mm, 10mm lead
Rolled Ground
–
High rigidity direct acting guide
Guide Electromagnetic brake
900 1000 1200
kg
20mm lead
Motor output
800
kg
Slide screw Positioning repeatability
600 700
Slide screw
10mm lead Horizontal specification
500
100
Operating temperature range Horizontal specification
200 300
400
mm Ball screw
Stroke
Specifications Holding torque
Nm
Deenergized operation type Rated voltage 24VDC
–
0.4
–
–
Caution Note ) Since a regenerative absorption unit may be necessary for vertical specifications, a separate inquiry should be made.
9
Series
LJ1H20
Dimensions Scale: 10%
12.5
110 67 20
9.5 Note ) Work piece mounting reference plane
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 15 4-M8 x 1.25 thread depth 20
ø8H8 depth10 Cable entry side
Note )
Body mounting reference plane
Area Z detail 8H8 depth 8 E
130
52
A (table movement range)
(G)
52.5 92
F
Area Z
82 90
(G)
D
90 135
With brake
92
C
67
11.5
92 58
B
4.5
8-ø5.6
9.4
30
10
45° 62
90 (T-slot pitch)
20
3-ø8H10 depth 20
18 T-slot dimensions Note)
Dimension table/without brake Model
LJ1H202- 100 - LJ1H202- 200 - LJ1H202- 300 - LJ1H202- 400 - LJ1H202- 500 - LJ1H202- 600 - LJ1H202C- 700 - LJ1H202C- 800 - LJ1H202C- 900 - LJ1H202C-1000 - LJ1H202SC -1200 -
(mm) Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
250 350 450 550 650 750 859 959 1059 1159 1359
316 416 516 616 716 816 916 1016 1116 1216 1416
132 232 332 432 532 632 732 832 932 1032 1232
462 562 662 762 862 962 1062 1162 1262 1362 1562
200 200 200 200 200 200 192 192 192 192 192
190 190 190 190 190 190 177 177 177 177 177
22 22 22 22 22 22 26 26 26 26 26
100 200 300 400 500 600
250 350 450 550 650 750
316 416 516 616 716 816
132 232 332 432 532 632
493 593 693 793 893 993
200 200 200 200 200 200
190 190 190 190 190 190
53 53 53 53 53 53
Dimension table/with brake LJ1H202-100K- LJ1H202-200K- LJ1H202-300K- LJ1H202-400K- LJ1H202-500K- LJ1H202-600K-
Note ) The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting equipment. When mounting the body unit, M6 x (30+α, α: effective thread length of the actuator mounting platform) bolts are required. When mounting using the T-slots on the actuator, special T-nuts are required. Refer to "Options" on page 40.
10
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
LJ1H20
Construction
o
!5 t
@0
!3
!4 w e
A
!4
!0
yr
!6!7
i
q
A'
@2 !9 u
!1 !8 !2 @1
View A–A' With brake
Parts list/Main parts No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Description AC servomotor Feed screw High rigidity direct acting guide Coupling Bearing R Bearing F Body A Table Housing A Housing B Body cover A
Parts list/Main parts Note Material – 100W – Ball screw/Slide screw – – – – Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy
No.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Description Side cover Bearing retainer Bumper End cover A End cover B Inner cover Motor cover R Motor cover L Auto switch Magnet Brake
Material Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy IIR PC PC PC PC PC – Rare earth magnet –
Note
11
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
H20 Nonstandard Motor Specifications (Motor Output:100W) Series
How to Order
LJ1 H 20 G 2 1 N A
300
F W
X10
Guide type
Note 1)
X10 Nonstandard motor
H High rigidity direct acting guide
Series 20
Limit switch
Series 20
Motor specifications G R Y
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yaskawa Electric Corporation
Cable entry direction
100W
Brake
Power supply voltage
when shipped with a nonstandard motor installed. The cable to connect the motor and driver is optional, and may be supplied by the customer, or the cable corresponding to the selected motor may be ordered separately from the section on how to order cables under "Options" on page 40.
Note 2)
None With brake
Nil K
100/115VAC 50/60Hz 200/230VAC 50/60Hz Without motor
1 2 0
Note 1) A driver is included
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
F R L T B
Motor output 2
None B contact specification 2pcs.
Nil W
Stroke (Refer to Table 1 below for applications).
Feed screw type
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200
(Refer to Table 1 below for applications).
P N S
Ground ball screw Rolled ball screw Slide screw
Feed screw lead (Refer to Table 1 below for applications).
F A C
5mm 10mm 20mm
100mm 200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 700mm 800mm 900mm 1000mm 1200mm
Top entry Left entry
Axial entry
Table 1: Feed screw and stroke combinations Model
LJ1H202PA- Stroke Screw combination
LJ1H202NA- Stroke
Stroke (mm)
100 • •
200 • •
300 • •
400 • •
LJ1H202PC- Stroke LJ1H202NC- Stroke LJ1H202SC- Stroke LJ1H202PF- Stroke K LJ1H202NF- Stroke K LJ1H202PA- Stroke K LJ1H202NA- Stroke K
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
• • • • •
500 • • • • • • • • •
600 • • • • • • • • •
700
800
• • •
• • •
900 1000 1200
• • •
• • •
•
Please note that combinations other than those shown above cannot be produced. Refer to page 10 for dimensions.
Caution Note 2) Units equipped with brakes are for vertical mounting. Since a regenerative absorption unit may be necessary depending on the operating conditions, a separate inquiry should be made.
12
Right entry
Bottom entry
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
LJ1H20
Specifications
Stroke
mm 100 200 kg 7.2 8.4
Ball screw
Weight (without motor)
kg
Slide screw
7.5
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 9.6 10.7 12.1 13.2 14.4 15.6 16.8 18.0 – 9.6 10.8 12.3 13.8 16.3 16.8 18.6 20.4 24.2
8.5
°C
Operating temperature range
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
10mm lead
Maximum work load
Ball screw Horizontal 20mm lead specification Slide screw 20mm lead 100W 5mm lead Vertical Note 1) Ball screw specification 10mm lead
15
kg
Ball screw Horizontal 20mm lead specification Maximum speed Slide screw 20mm lead 100W mm/s 5mm lead Vertical Note 1) specification Ball screw 10mm lead
Feed screw
Rolled, Ground
–
– 930
740 600
500
–
500 250 500
–
ø15mm, 10mm lead
–
– –
ø15mm, 20mm lead ø20mm, 20mm lead
ø16mm, 5mm lead ø15mm, 10mm lead
–
High rigidity direct acting guide
Guide Electromagnetic Specifications brake
– 1000
Rolled Rolled, Ground
Ball screw
–
15 8 500
–
Note 1)
Vertical specification
–
30
10mm lead
Ball screw Horizontal specification Slide screw
–
30 –
Holding torque
Limit switch Note 2)
Deenergized operation type Rated voltage 24V
–
0.4
–
Nm
Power supply voltage: 4.5 to 28VDC Current consumption: 12mA or less Control output: Open collector, maximum load current 150mA
Specifications
Caution Note 1) Since the maximum work load for vertical specifications is influenced by the regenerative power throughput of the drive, this should be reviewed carefully. Note 2) Refer to the drawing below for the internal circuitry of the limit switch.
The following motors can be mounted when specified.
Motor output Power supply voltage (AC) (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yaskawa Electric Corporation
100 100 100
100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230
Motor model
Compatible driver model
MSM011P1A MSM012P1A
MSD011P1E MSD013P1E MR-C10A1 MR-C10A SGDE-01BP SGDE-01AP
HC-PQ13 SGME-01BF12 SGME-01AF12
∗ Refer to the motor compatibility table on page 42 when specified without motor. For the dimensions of the motor mounting area, refer to the dimensions for Series LJ1 H S 20 on page 43. These may be used for reference during design and assembly. ∗ For detailed driver specifications, etc., inquiries should be directed to the respective motor manufacturers.
Limit Switch Internal Circuit D -Y59AL-232
+
Brown [Red] Main switch circuit
Nonstandard Compatible Motors:
Output Black [White]
–
Blue [Black]
13
Uniaxial Electric Actuator
H30 Motor Output: 200W
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
How to Order
LJ1 H 30 3 1 N D 600
F 2
Guide type H
Cable length
High rigidity direct acting guide
2 3 4 5
Series 30
Series 30
Motor output 3
Cable entry direction
200W
F R L T B
Power supply voltage 100/110VAC 50/60Hz 200/220VAC 50/60Hz
1 2
Brake (Refer to Table 1 below for applications.)
Note )
Top entry
Left entry
Ground ball screw Rolled ball screw Slide screw
Stroke (Refer to Table 1 below for applications.)
200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1500
Feed screw lead (Refer to Table 1 below for applications.)
A D E
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
None With brake
Nil K
Feed screw type P N S
2000mm 3000mm 4000mm 5000mm
10mm 25mm 40mm
200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 800mm 1000mm 1200mm 1500mm
Axial entry
Bottom entry
Table 1: Feed screw and stroke combinations
Screw combination
Model
LJ1H303PD- Stroke LJ1H303ND- Stroke LJ1H303SE- Stroke LJ1H303PA- Stroke K LJ1H303NA- Stroke K
Stroke (mm)
200 • • • • •
300 • • • • •
400 • • • • •
500 • • • • •
600 • • • • •
800 1000 1200 1500 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Please note that combinations other than those shown above cannot be produced.
Caution Note) Units equipped with brakes are for vertical mounting. Since a regenerative absorption unit may be necessary depending on the operating conditions, a separate inquiry should be made.
14
Right entry
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
LJ1H30
Specifications
mm
300
400
500
600
800
1000
1200
1500
Ball screw
kg
16.0 18.0
20.0
22.0
24.0
28.5
33.0
37.0
43.0
Slide screw
kg
14.9 17.0
19.0
21.1
23.2
27.3
31.5
35.6
41.9
700
500
Stroke Weight
°C
Operating temperature range Horizontal specification
Maximum work load
Vertical Note 1) specification
Maximum speed Note 2)
Rated thrust
Positioning repeatability
Motor output
25mm lead Slide screw 40mm lead 200W Ball screw 10mm lead Ball screw
Vertical Note 1) specification
Ball screw
10mm lead
Ball screw
25mm lead
Vertical Note 1) specification
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
Ball screw
Horizontal specification
Horizontal specification
200
60 30
kg
–
20
25mm lead
1000
Slide screw 40mm lead 200W mm/s
Slide screw 40mm lead 200W Ball screw 10mm lead
500 –
500 144 N
50 –
360 ±0.05
Rolled
Ball screw Slide screw
±0.02
mm
Ground
±0.1
Rolled
AC servomotor (200W)
Horizontal specification Vertical specification
Note 1)
AC servomotor (200W) Incremental system
Encoder Horizontal specification
Rolled
Ball screw
Vertical Note 1) specification
ø30mm, 40mm lead
Rolled
Slide screw
Feed screw
ø25mm, 25mm lead
Ground Rolled
Ball screw
–
ø20mm, 10mm lead
Ground
Guide
–
High rigidity direct acting guide
Electromagnetic Specifications brake Holding torque
Deenergized operation type Rated voltage 24VDC
–
1.0
–
Nm
–
Caution Note 1) Since a regenerative absorption unit may be necessary for vertical specifications, a separate inquiry should be made. Note 2) Since there is a speed limitation based on the load weight even in the case of a horizontal actuator, refer to the table below.
(Table) Maximum speed for each load weight Model LJ1H3031D-200 to 1000- LJ1H3031D-1200- LJ1H3031D-1500- LJ1H3032D-200 to 1000- LJ1H3032D-1200- LJ1H3032D-1500-
100 1000 700 500 1000 700 500
Unit (mm/s) 200 1000 700 500 900 700 500
Load weight (N) 300 400 1000 1000 700 700 500 500 800 700 700 700 500 500
500 900 700 500 650 650 500
600 800 700 500 600 600 500
Note Power supply 100/110(V)±10% Compatible controller LC1-1B3H1- Power supply 200(V)±10% Compatible controller LC1-1B3H2-
∗ Consult with SMC in case the above conditions are exceeded.
15
Series
LJ1H30
Dimensions Scale: 10% ø8H10 depth10
120 80 20
4-M8 x 1.25 thread depth 10 4-M12 x 1.75 thread depth 15 Cable entry side
12.5 Work piece mounting Note) reference plane
16.5
8H10 depth8 160
Body mounting Note) reference plane
212
Area Z detail
63 (D)
A (table movement range)
63.5
110
194.5
Area Z
105 113
(D)
C
110 170
With brake
80
110 (T-slot pitch)
20
8-ø9
76
11.5 3-ø5H10 depth 5 B
45° 110
30
33
9.4
4.5 10
110
18
T-slot dimensions Note)
Dimension table/without brake Model
LJ1H303 - 200 - LJ1H303 - 300 - LJ1H303 - 400 - LJ1H303 - 500 - LJ1H303 - 600 - LJ1H303 - 800 - LJ1H303 -1000 - LJ1H303 -1200 - LJ1H303 -1500 -
(mm) Stroke 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1500
A
B
C
D
404 504 604 704 804 1004 1204 1404 1704
297 397 497 597 697 897 1097 1297 1597
630 730 830 930 1030 1230 1430 1630 1930
31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
200 300 400 500 600
404 504 604 704 804
297 397 497 597 697
661 761 861 961 1061
62.5 62.5 62.5 62.5 62.5
Dimension table/with brake LJ1H303 A-200K- LJ1H303 A-300K- LJ1H303 A-400K- LJ1H303 A-500K- LJ1H303 A-600K- Note ) The
body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting equipment. When mounting the body unit, M8 x (30+α, α: effective thread length of the actuator mounting platform) bolts are required. When mounting using the T-slots on the actuator, special T-nuts are required. Refer to "Options" on page 40.
16
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
LJ1H30
Construction
o
y !0
!4
!5 t
e w
@0
!3 r
!4
!9
!8
!6!7
q
i A
A'
!1
@2
u
!2
@1
View A–A' With brake
Parts list/Main parts
Parts list/Main parts No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Description AC servomotor Feed screw High rigidity direct acting guide Coupling Bearing R Bearing F Body A Table Housing A Housing B Top cover
Note Material 200W – Ball screw/Slide screw – – – – – Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy
No.
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Description Side cover Bearing retainer Bumper End cover A End cover B Inner cover Motor cover A Motor cover B Auto switch Magnet Brake
Material Aluminum alloy Carbon steel IIR PC PC PC PC PC – Rare earth magnet –
Note Kanigen plated
17
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
H30 Nonstandard Motor Specifications (Motor Output: 200W) Series
How to Order
LJ1 H 30 G 3 1 N D
600
F W
X10
Guide type
Note 1)
X10 Nonstandard motor
H High rigidity direct acting guide
Series 30
Limit switch Nil W
Series 30
None B contact specification 2pcs.
Motor specifications G R Y
Cable entry direction
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yaskawa Electric Corporation
Motor output 3
Note 1) A driver is included when shipped with a nonstandard motor installed. The cable to connect the motor and driver is optional, and may be supplied by the customer, or the cable corresponding to the selected motor may be ordered separately from the section on how to order cables under "Options" on page 40.
200W
Brake
Power supply voltage 1 2 0
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
F R L T B
Nil K
100/115VAC 50/60Hz 200/230VAC 50/60Hz Without motor
Note 2)
None With brake
Stroke (Refer to Table 1 below for applications).
Feed screw type
200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1500
(Refer to Table 1 below for applications).
P N S
Ground ball screw Rolled ball screw Slide screw
Feed screw lead (Refer to Table 1 below for applications).
A D E
10mm 25mm 40mm
200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 800mm 1000mm 1200mm 1500mm
Top entry Left entry
Axial entry
Table 1: Feed screw and stroke combinations
Screw combination
Model
LJ1H303PD- Stroke LJ1H303ND- Stroke LJ1H303SE- Stroke LJ1H303PA- Stroke K LJ1H303NA- Stroke K
Stroke (mm)
200 • • • • •
300 • • • • •
400 • • • • •
500 • • • • •
600 • • • • •
800 • • •
1000 1200 1500 • • • • • • • • •
Please note that combinations other than those shown above cannot be produced. Refer to page 16 for dimensions.
Caution Note 2) Units equipped with brakes are for vertical mounting. Since a regenerative absorption unit may be necessary depending on the operating conditions, a separate inquiry should be made.
18
Right entry
Bottom entry
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
Series
LJ1H30
Specifications
Stroke
mm Ball screw
Weight (without motor)
kg kg
Slide screw
200 14.9 13.8
300 16.9 15.9
°C
Operating temperature range
Horizontal Ball screw specification Slide screw Vertical specification
Ball screw
Rolled Ground Rolled Rolled Ground
600 22.9 22.1
800 27.4 26.2
1000 31.9 30.4
1200 35.9 34.5
1500 41.9 40.8
700
500
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
25mm lead Maximum Slide screw 40mm lead 200W kg work load Vertical Note 1) Ball screw 10mm lead specification Ball screw 25mm lead Note 3) Horizontal Maximum speed specification Slide screw 40mm lead 200W mm/s Vertical Note 1) Ball screw 10mm lead specification Horizontal specification Motor output Vertical specification Note 1) Encoder
Note 1)
500 20.9 20
Ball screw
Horizontal specification
Feed screw
400 18.9 17.9
60 30 –
20 1000
500 500
– AC servomotor (200W) AC servomotor (200W) Incremental system ø25mm, 25mm lead ø30mm, 40mm lead –
ø20mm, 10mm lead
–
High rigidity direct acting guide
Guide Electromagnetic Specifications brake Holding torque
–
1.0
–
Nm
Note 2)
Limit switch
Deenergized operation type Rated voltage 24V
–
Power supply voltage: 4.5 to 28VDC Current consumption: 12mA or less Control output: Open collector, maximum load current 150mA
Specifications
Caution Note 1) Since the maximum work load for vertical specifications is influenced by the regenerative power throughput of the drive, this should be reviewed carefully. Note 2) Refer to the drawing below for the internal circuitry of the limit switch. Note 3) Since the maximum speed may be limited by the work load, a separate inquiry should be made.
The following motors can be mounted when specified.
Motor output Power supply voltage (AC) (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD
200
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
200
Yaskawa Electric Corporation
200
100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230
Limit Switch Internal Circuit D -Y59AL-232
Motor model
Compatible driver model
MSM021P1A MSM022P1A
MSD021P1E MSD023P1E MR-C20A1 MR-C20A SGDE-02BP SGDE-02AP
HC-PQ23 SGME-02BF12 SGME-02AF12
+
Brown [Red] Main switch circuit
Nonstandard Compatible Motors:
Output Black [White]
–
Blue [Black]
∗ Refer to the motor compatibility table on page 42 when specified without motor. For the dimensions of the motor mounting area, refer to the dimensions for Series LJ1 H S 30 on page 43. These may be used for reference during design and assembly. ∗ For detailed driver specifications, etc., inquiries should be directed to the respective motor manufacturers.
19
Uniaxial Electric Actuator
Series
S
Slider Guide
LJ1S10 Series ....................... P22 LJ1S20 Series ....................... P28 LJ1S30 Series ....................... P34
21
Uniaxial Electric Actuator
S10 Motor Output: 50W
Slide Bearing Type Direct Acting Guide
Series
How to Order
LJ1 S 10 1 1 S C
100
F 2
Guide type S
Cable length
Slider guide
2 3 4 5
Series 10
Series 10
Motor output 1
Cable entry direction
50W
F R L T B
Power supply voltage 1 2
2000mm 3000mm 4000mm 5000mm
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
100/110VAC 50/60Hz 200/220VAC 50/60Hz
Feed screw type S
Slide screw
Feed screw lead C
20mm
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
100mm 200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 700mm 800mm 900mm 1000mm
Left entry
Axial entry
Please make separate inquiry regarding combinations with ball screw and a special slider guide, which can also be arranged in addition to the above.
22
Top entry
Right entry
Bottom entry
Slider Guide Type
Series
LJ1S10
Specifications
Stroke
mm
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Weight
kg
5.4
6.1
6.9
7.7
8.5
9.3
10.0
10.8
11.6
12.4
Operating temperature range
°C
5 to 40 (With no condensation)
Maximum work load
kg
5
mm/s
300
N
24
mm
±0.1
Maximum speed Rated thrust Positioning repeatability
AC servomotor (50W)
Motor output
Incremental system
Encoder Feed screw Guide
Rolled slide screw
ø20mm, 20mm lead Slider guide
23
Series
LJS10
Dimensions Scale: 15%
10
80 ø5H10 depth 8
45 20
Work piece mounting Note) reference plane
8-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8 Cable entry side
5H10 depth 6 100
Body mounting Note) reference plane
201
Area Z detail
60 50 Area Z
192
C
90
A (table movement range)
83
(43)
40 80
40 (T-slot pitch)
36
11.5
40
30
18 T-slot dimensions Note)
Dimension table Model
LJ1S101SC- 100- LJ1S101SC- 200- LJ1S101SC- 300- LJ1S101SC- 400- LJ1S101SC- 500- LJ1S101SC- 600- LJ1S101SC- 700- LJ1S101SC- 800- LJ1S101SC- 900- LJ1S101SC-1000-
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
A
B
C
225 325 425 525 625 725 825 925 1025 1125
245 345 445 545 645 745 845 945 1045 1145
460 560 660 760 860 960 1060 1160 1260 1360
Note ) Special T-nuts are required to secure the body. The special T-nuts are included with the body unit. Refer to "Options" on page 40 regarding the quantity of T-nuts, etc. The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting equipment.
24
10
9.4 80
B
4.5
45° 3-ø5H10 depth 5
Slider Guide Type
Series
LJ1S10
Construction
@0 !3
o
!2
w e
A
!8
!5 @1@2
!9 !0 !4 i
u
q
A'
@6 !7
@3
r !6 t !1
y @4 @5
View A-A'
Parts list/Main parts
Parts list/Main parts No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Description AC servomotor Feed screw Guide frame Guide plate A Guide plate B Push bar Frame cover Coupling Bearing R Bearing F Frame A Table Housing B
Material – – Aluminum alloy Special resin Special resin Carbon steel Stainless steel – – – Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy
Note 50W Slide screw
Zinc plated
No.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Description Material Housing A Aluminum alloy Top cover A Aluminum alloy Side cover Aluminum alloy Sensor rail Aluminum alloy Bearing retainer Aluminum alloy Bumper IIR End cover A PC End cover B PC Inner cover PC Magnet Rare earth magnet Hexagon socket set screw Chrome molybdenum steel Nut Mild steel Auto switch –
Note
M3 x 8 M3
25
S10 Nonstandard Motor Specifications (Motor Output: 50W)
Slide Bearing Type
Direct Acting Guide
Series
How to Order
LJ1 S 10 G 1 1 S C
100
F W
X10
Guide type S
Note )
X10 Nonstandard motor
Slider guide
Limit switch
Series 10
Nil W
Series 10
None B contact specification 2pcs.
Motor specifications G R Y
Cable entry direction
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yaskawa Electric Corporation
F R L T B
Motor output 1
Note ) A driver is included when shipped with a nonstandard motor installed. The cable to connect the motor and driver is optional, and may be supplied by the customer, or the cable corresponding to the selected motor may be ordered separately from the section on how to order cables under "Options" on page 40.
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
50W
Stroke Power supply voltage 1 2 0
100/115VAC 50/60Hz 200/230VAC 50/60Hz Without motor
Feed screw type S
Slide screw
Feed screw lead C
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
100mm 200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 700mm 800mm 900mm 1000mm
Top entry Left entry
20mm Axial entry
Right entry
Bottom entry Please make separate inquiry regarding combinations with ball screw and a special slider guide, which can be arranged in addition to the above. Refer to page 24 for dimensions.
26
Series
Slider Guide Type
LJ1S10
Specifications
mm
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Weight (without motor)
kg
5.0
5.7
6.5
7.3
8.1
8.9
9.6
10.4
11.2
12.0
Operating temperature range
°C
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
Maximum work load
kg
5
Stroke
Maximum speed Positioning repeatability
mm/s
300
mm
±0.1 ø20mm, 20mm lead
Rolled slide screw
Feed screw
Slider guide
Guide
Power supply voltage: 4.5 to 28VDC Current consumption: 12mA or less Control output: Open collector, maximum load current: 150mA
Specifications
Limit switch Note)
Note) Refer to the drawing below for the internal circuitry of the limit switch.
The following motors can be mounted when specified.
Motor output Power supply voltage (AC) (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD
50
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
50
Yaskawa Electric Corporation
50
100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230
Motor model
MSM5AZP1A HC-PQ053 SGME-A5BF12 SGME-A5AF12
Compatible driver model
MSD5A1P1E MSD5A3P1E MR-C10A1 MR-C10A SGDE-A5BP SGDE-A5AP
Limit Switch Internal Circuit D -Y59AL-232 +
Brown [Red] Main switch circuit
Nonstandard Compatible Motors:
Output Black [White]
–
Blue [Black]
∗ Refer to the motor compatibility table on page 42 when specified without motor. For the dimensions of the motor mounting area, refer to the dimensions for Series LJ1 H S 10 on page 43. These may be used for reference during design and assembly. ∗ For detailed driver specifications, etc., inquiries should be directed to the respective motor manufacturers.
27
Uniaxial Electric Actuator
S20 Motor Output: 100W
Slide Bearing Type Direct Acting Guide
Series
How to Order
LJ1 S 20 2 1 S C 300
F 2
Guide type S
Cable length
Slider guide
2 3 4 5
Series 20
Series 20
Motor output 2
Cable entry direction
100W
F R L T B
Power supply voltage 1 2
2000mm 3000mm 4000mm 5000mm
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
100/110VAC 50/60Hz 200/220VAC 50/60Hz
Left entry
Feed screw type S
Slide screw
Feed screw lead C
20mm
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200
100mm 200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 700mm 800mm 900mm 1000mm 1200mm
Please make separate inquiry regarding combinations with ball screw and a special slider guide, which can also be arranged in addition to the above.
28
Top entry
Axial entry
Right entry
Bottom entry
Slider Guide Type
Series
LJ1S20
Specifications
Stroke
mm
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
Weight
kg
6.8
7.9
9.0
10.1
11.1
12.2 13.3
14.3
15.4
16.4
18.6
Operating temperature range
°C
Maximum work load Maximum speed Rated thrust Positioning repeatability Motor output
Guide
kg
10
mm/s
300
N
50
mm
±0.1 AC servomotor (100W)
Encoder Feed screw
5 to 40 (With no condensation)
Incremental system Rolled slide screw
ø20mm, 20mm lead Slider guide
29
Series
LJ1S20
Dimensions Scale: 10% 12.5
110 67
9.5 Work piece mounting Note) reference plane
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 15 4-M8 x 1.25 thread depth 20
20 ø8H8 thread depth10
Cable entry side
8H8 depth 8
Area Z detail
E
140
Body mounting Note) reference plane
52
A (table movement range)
F
Area Z
82 90
(G)
52.5 92
D
90 135
C
3-ø8H10 depth 20 20
92
B
45°
58
9.4
30
18
10
92
4.5
8–ø6.6
62
90 (T-slot pitch)
67
11.5
T-slot dimensions Note)
Dimension table/without brake Model
LJ1S202 SC- 100- LJ1S202 SC- 200- LJ1S202 SC- 300- LJ1S202 SC- 400- LJ1S202 SC- 500- LJ1S202 SC- 600- LJ1S202 SC- 700- LJ1S202 SC- 800- LJ1S202 SC- 900- LJ1S202 SC-1000- LJ1S202 SC-1200-
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
269 369 469 569 669 769 878 978 1078 1178 1378
316 416 516 616 716 816 916 1016 1116 1216 1416
132 232 332 432 532 632 732 832 932 1032 1232
462 562 662 762 862 962 1062 1162 1262 1362 1562
184 184 184 184 184 184 176 176 176 176 176
175 175 175 175 175 175 162 162 162 162 162
18 18 18 18 18 18 22 22 22 22 22
Note ) The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting equipment. When mounting the body unit, M6 x (33+α, α: effective thread length of the actuator mounting platform) bolts are required. When mounting using the T-slots on the actuator, special T-nuts are required. Refer to "Options" on page 40.
30
Slider Guide Type
Series
LJ1S20
Construction
!3
!0
o
!9
!8
w !7
@4 A
!8
!2 @7 @6
e
!4
i
@0@1 q
A'
@3
!5 @2
u
!1
r t !6 y @5
View A-A'
Parts list/Main parts No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Description AC servomotor Feed screw Guide frame Guide plate A Guide plate B Push bar Frame cover Coupling Bearing R Bearing F Body A Table Housing A
Parts list/Main parts Material – – Aluminum alloy Special resin Special resin Carbon steel Stainless steel – – – Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy
Note 100W Slide screw
Zinc plated
No.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Material Description Aluminum alloy Housing B Aluminum alloy Body cover A Aluminum alloy Side cover Bearing retainer Aluminum alloy Bumper IIR End cover A PC End cover B PC Inner cover PC Motor cover R PC Motor cover L PC Auto switch – Magnet Rare earth magnet Hexagon socket set screw Chrome molybdenum steel Nut Mild steel
Note
M4 x 8 M4
31
S20 Nonstandard Motor Specifications (Motor Output: 100W)
Slide Bearing Type
Direct Acting Guide
Series
How to Order
LJ1 S 20 G 2 1 S C
300
F W X10
Guide type S
Note )
Slider guide
X10 Nonstandard motor
Series 20
Limit switch
Series 20
Nil W
Motor specifications G R Y
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yaskawa Electric Corporation
Cable entry direction F R L T B
Motor output 2
100W
Stroke
Power supply voltage 1 2 0
None B contact specification 2pcs.
100/115VAC 50/60Hz 200/230VAC 50/60Hz Without motor
Feed screw type S
Slide screw
Feed screw lead C
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200
100mm 200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 700mm 800mm 900mm 1000mm 1200mm
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
Note ) A driver is included when shipped with a nonstandard motor installed. The cable to connect the motor and driver is optional, and may be supplied by the customer, or the cable corresponding to the selected motor may be ordered separately from the section on how to order cables under "Options" on page 40.
Top entry Left entry
20mm Axial entry
Right entry
Bottom entry
Please make separate inquiry regarding combinations with ball screw and a special slider guide, which can be arranged in addition to the above. Refer to page 30 for dimensions.
32
Slider Guide Type
Series
LJ1S20
Specifications
mm
100
200
300
Weight (without motor)
kg
6.3
7.4
8.5
Operating temperature range
°C
Stroke
Maximum work load Maximum speed
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000 1200
9.6
10.6
11.7
12.8
13.8
14.9
15.9
kg
10
mm/s
300 ±0.1
mm
Positioning repeatability
ø20mm, 20mm lead
Rolled slide screw
Feed screw
18.1
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
Slider guide
Guide Limit switch Note)
Power supply voltage: 4.5 to 28VDC Current consumption: 12mA or less Control output: Open collector, maximum load current: 150mA
Specifications
Note) Refer to the drawing below for the internal circuitry of the limit switch.
The following motors can be mounted when specified.
Motor output Power supply voltage (AC) (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD
100
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
100
Yaskawa Electric Corporation
100
100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230
Motor model
MSM011P1A MSM012P1A HC-PQ13 SGME-01BF12 SGME-01AF12
Compatible driver model
MSD011P1E MSD013P1E MR-C10A1 MR-C10A SGDE-01BP SGDE-01AP
Limit Switch Internal Circuit D -Y59AL-232 +
Brown [Red] Main switch circuit
Nonstandard Compatible Motors:
Output Black [White]
–
Blue [Black]
∗ Refer to the motor compatibility table on page 42 when specified without motor. For the dimensions of the motor mounting area, refer to the dimensions for Series LJ1 H S 20 on page 43. These may be used for reference during design and assembly. ∗ For detailed driver specifications, etc., inquiries should be directed to the respective motor manufacturers.
33
Uniaxial Electric Actuator
S30 Motor Output: 200W
Slide Bearing Type Direct Acting Guide
Series
How to Order
LJ1 S 30 3 1 S C 600
F 2
Guide type S
Cable length
Slider guide
2 3 4 5
Series 30
Series 30
Cable entry direction
Motor output 3
200W
F R L T B
Power supply voltage 1 2
100/110VAC 50/60Hz 200VAC 50/60Hz
Slide screw
Feed screw lead C
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
Top entry Left entry
Feed screw type S
2000mm 3000mm 4000mm 5000mm
20mm
Stroke 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1500
200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 800mm 1000mm 1200mm 1500mm
Please make separate inquiry regarding combinations with ball screw and a special slider guide, which can also be arranged in addition to the above.
34
Axial entry
Right entry
Bottom entry
Slider Guide Type
Series
LJ1S30
Specifications
Stroke
mm
200
300
400
500
600
800
1000
1200
1500
Weight
kg
14.4
16.2
18.0
19.8
21.5
25.7
29.7
33.3
38.7
Operating temperature range
°C
5 to 40 (With no condensation)
Maximum work load
kg
20
mm/s
500
N
50
Maximum speed Rated thrust
mm
Positioning repeatability
Incremental system
Encoder Feed screw Guide
±0.1 AC servomotor (200W)
Motor output Rolled slide screw
ø25mm, 20mm lead Slider guide
35
Series
LJ1S30
Dimensions Scale: 10%
ø8H10 depth10
120 80 20
4-M8 x 1.25 thread depth 10 4-M12 x 1.75 thread depth 15
16.5
Cable entry side
12.5 Work piece mounting Note) reference plane
8H10 depth8
200
246.5
Body mounting Note ) reference plane
Area Z detail
(31.5)
A (table movement range)
63 110
63.5 Area Z
105 113
221.5
C
110 170
4-ø8H10 depth 19
110
110
B
30
33
45° 9.4 18
T-slot dimensions Note)
Dimension table/without brake Model
LJ1S303SC- 200- LJ1S303SC- 300- LJ1S303SC- 400- LJ1S303SC- 500- LJ1S303SC- 600- LJ1S303SC- 800- LJ1S303SC-1000- LJ1S303SC-1200- LJ1S303SC-1500-
Stroke 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1500
A
B
C
445 545 645 745 845 1045 1245 1445 1745
365 465 565 665 765 965 1165 1365 1665
698 798 898 998 1098 1298 1498 1698 1998
Note) The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting equipment. When mounting the body unit, M8 x (30+α, α: effective thread length of the actuator mounting platform) bolts are required. When mounting using the T-slots on the actuator, special T-nuts are required. Refer to "Options" on page 40.
36
11.5
4.5 10
76
110 (T-slot pitch)
77
20
8–ø9
Slider Guide Type
Series
LJ1S30
Construction
!3
!9
!0 !4
o
w
!8 @4 e !2
A
!7
@7 @6
!8 i
@0@1 q
A'
@3 !5 @2 u
r t !6 @5 y
!1 View A-A'
Parts list/Main parts
Parts list/Main parts No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Description AC servomotor Feed screw Guide frame Guide plate A Guide plate B Push bar Frame cover Coupling Bearing R Bearing F Body A Table Housing A
Material – – Aluminum alloy Special resin Special resin Carbon steel Stainless steel – – – Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy
Note
No.
200W Slide screw
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Zinc plated
Note Description Material Housing B Aluminum alloy Body cover A Aluminum alloy Side cover Aluminum alloy Bearing retainer Kanigen plated Carbon steel Bumper IIR End cover A PC End cover B PC Inner cover PC Motor cover R PC Motor cover L PC Auto switch – Magnet Rare earth magnet Hexagon socket set screw Chrome molybdenum steel M5 x 8 Nut Mild steel M5
37
High Rigidity Direct Acting Guide Type
S30 Nonstandard Motor Specifications (Motor Output: 200W) Series
How to Order
LJ1 S 30 G 3 1 S C
600
F W
X10
Guide type S
Note )
X10 Nonstandard motor
Slider guide
Series 30
Limit switch
Series 30
Nil W
Motor specifications G R Y
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yaskawa Electric Corporation
Cable entry direction F R L T B
Motor output 3
200W
Stroke
Power supply voltage 1 2 0
None B contact specification 2pcs.
100/115VAC 50/60Hz 200/230VAC 50/60Hz Without motor
Feed screw type S
Slide screw
200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1500
200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm 800mm 1000mm 1200mm 1500mm
Axial Right Left Top Bottom
Note ) A driver is included when shipped with a nonstandard motor installed. The cable to connect the motor and driver is optional, and may be supplied by the customer, or the cable corresponding to the selected motor may be ordered separately from the section on how to order cables under "Options" on page 40.
Top entry Left entry
Feed screw lead C
20mm Axial entry
Right entry Bottom entry
Please make separate inquiry regarding combinations with ball screw and a special slider guide, which can be arranged in addition to the above. Refer to page 36 for dimensions.
38
Slider Guide Type
Series
LJ1S30
Specifications
mm
200
300
400
500
600
800
1000
1200
1500
Weight (without motor)
kg
13.3
15.1
16.9
18.7
20.4
24.6
28.6
32.2
37.6
Operating temperature range
°C
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
Maximum work load
kg
20
Stroke
mm/s
Maximum speed Feed screw
500
Rolled slide screw
ø25mm, 20mm lead
Guide
Slider guide
Limit switch Note)
Power supply voltage: 4.5 to 28VDC Current consumption: 12mA or less Control output: Open collector, maximum load current: 150mA
Specifications
Note ) Refer to the drawing below for the internal circuitry of the limit switch.
The following motors can be mounted when specified.
Motor output Power supply voltage (AC) (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD
200
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
200
Yaskawa Electric Corporation
200
100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230 100/115 200/230
Motor model
MSM021P1A MSM022P1A HC-PQ23 SGME-02BF12 SGME-02AF12
Corresponding driver model
MSD021P1E MSD023P1E MR-C20A1 MR-C20A SGDE-02BP SGDE-02AP
Limit Switch Internal Circuit D -Y59AL-232 +
Brown [Red] Main switch circuit
Nonstandard Compatible Motors:
Output Black [White]
–
Blue [Black]
∗ Refer to the motor compatibility table on page 42 when specified without motor. For the dimensions of the motor mounting area, refer to the dimensions for Series LJ1 H S 20 on page 43. These may be used for reference during design and assembly. ∗ For detailed driver specifications, etc., inquiries should be directed to the respective motor manufacturers.
39
Series LJ1
Option Specifications T-nuts for Mounting Electric Actuator
Dustproof Cover
T-nuts are used when mounting an actuator using its T-slots. When mounting by means of T-nuts alone, the quantity of nuts indicated below should be used as a minimum.
The dustproof cover prevents the entry of dust, paper dust and scraps, etc.
T-nut (nut size M8) Type LJ1-T8 (weight 8.4g)
17.5
M8
7.5
Material: Polyurethane Consult SMC for details.
15
T-nut quantities for mounting Model
Quantity 200mm stroke or less
LJ1H S10
6pcs.
300mm stroke or more
LJ1H S20
8pcs.
LJ1H S30
8pcs.
8pcs.
∗ T-nuts are built into the body unit for Series LJ1HS10 only.
Cover with Switch Slots
Nonstandard Motor Cables
This is a cover with T-slots for mounting external switches. Switch positions can be easily changed. It is used by replacing the standard cover.
Cables for connecting nonstandard motors and drivers. Cable lengths other than those shown below should be arranged by the customer.
How to Order
How to Order
LJ1
K 2
Compatible model 1 2 3
LJ1HS10 LJ1HS20 LJ1HS30
LJ1
300 100mm 200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm
700 800 900 1000 1200 1500
700mm 800mm 900mm 1000mm 1200mm 1500mm
G R Y
A 3.3 5.8 3.1
40
5m
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
Cable compatibility table Model
Manufacturer's No.
LJ1-1-G05 Note 1)
MFMCA0050AEB (for motor) MFECA0050EAB (for encoder)
LJ1-1-R05
(for motor) Note 2) MR-CCBL5M (for encoder)
LJ1-1-Y05
A 30 55 69
05
Compatible models
∗ Refer to "Series Variations" on Feature page 3 for correspondence of models and strokes.
Dimension table Model LJ1HS10 LJ1HS20 LJ1HS30
G 05 Cable length
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
1
Note 3)
DP9320081-2 (for motor) DP9320089-2 (for encoder)
Note 1) When the Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD motor driver is selected, in addition to the cable, a power supply connector (MOLEX 5569-1OR) and an interface connector (3M 10126-3000VE) are also required. Note 2) A cable is not provided for the Mitsubishi Electric Corporation motor, and therefore the customer should arrange a 4 wire 0.75mm2 electric cable. Note 3) When the Yasukawa Electric Corporation motor driver is selected, a digital operator and personal computer are required for selecting the various parameters.
Please refer to the technical literature of each manufacturer for further details.
Electric Actuator TSUBAKICABLEVEYOR® Unit for Electric Actuator
Series
LJ1
TSUBAKICABLEVEYOR® is a registered trade mark of the TSUBAKIMOTO CHAIN CO.
Able to compactly arrange supporting guides for cables and hoses.
Series LJ1HS10 How to Order
8-ø9
C 1
100
8-ø5.5
83 50
LJ1
100 80 45 20
Stroke 100mm 200mm 300mm 400mm 500mm 600mm
700 800 900 1000 1200 1500
2-ø5H10
700mm 800mm 900mm 1000mm 1200mm 1500mm
View A
A
∗ Refer to "Series Variations" on Feature page 3 for correspondence of models and strokes
Series LJ1HS20
20
10
100 200 300 400 500 600
59
LJ1HS10 LJ1HS20 LJ1HS30
44.5 122
Series LJ1HS30
4-ø14
4-ø13 4-ø6.5
138 92
A
4-ø9 4-M6 x 1 4-ø8H10
4-ø19 View A
40
80
10.5 110.5
75
View A
2-ø8H10 20
10
4-ø9
4-ø14
170 110 92
4-ø11
A
160 120 80 67 20
128 138.5
130 110 67 20
14
1 2 3
103 110.5
Compatible model
54
42
234
177
Construction/Parts list Parts list No. 1 2 3 4 5
et w
r q
Description TSUBAKICABLEVEYOR® Cable side cover Mounting plate Cable flange End cap
Material – Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy EP
Note – – – – –
Precautions on handling of the TSUBAKICABLEVEYOR® 1. When handling, connecting and disconnecting the TSUBAKICABLEVEYOR® • Wear suitable clothing and appropriate protective gear (safety glasses, gloves, safety shoes, etc.). • Use suitable tools. • Provide support so that the TSUBAKICABLEVEYOR® and parts do not move freely. 2. Implement protective measures (safety cover, etc.). 3. Be sure to turn off the power and ensure that it cannot be turned on accidently before installation, removal or maintenance of the equipment. 4. In order to prevent secondary accidents, put the surrounding area in good order and operate under safe conditions.
41
Series LJ1
Reference Data Motor Options 1 The following motors can be mounted when specified without motor. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD
Power supply voltage (AC) 100/115
50 200/230
100/115 100 200/230
100/115 200 200/230
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
100/115 50 200/230
100/115 100 200/230
100/115 200 200/230
Yaskawa Electric Corporation
100/115 50 200/230
100/115 100 200/230
100/115 200 200/230
42
Motor model
Compatible driver model
MSM5AZP1A
MSD5A1P1E
MSM5AZA1A
MSD5A1A1X
MSM5AZP1A
MSD5A3P1E
MSM5AZA1A
MSD5A3A1X
MSM011P1A
MSD011P1E
LJ1H10 (vertical only)
MSM011A1A
MSD011A1X
LJ1H20
MSM012P1A
MSD013P1E
LJ1S20
MSM012A1A
MSD013A1X
MSM021P1A
MSD021P1E
MSM021A1A
MSD021A1X
MSM022P1A
MSD023P1E
MSM022A1A
MSD023A1X
HC-PQ053
MR-C10A1
HA-ME053
MR-J10MA1
HC-MF053
MR-J2-10A1
HC-PQ053
MR-C10A
HA-ME053
MR-J10MA
HC-MF053
MR-J2-10A
HC-PQ13
MR-C10A1
HA-ME13
MR-J10MA1
HC-MF13
MR-J2-10A1
HC-PQ13
MR-C10A
HA-ME13
MR-J10MA
HC-MF13
MR-J2-10A
HC-PQ23
MR-C20MA1
HA-ME23
MR-J20A1
HC-MF23
MR-J2-20A1
HC-PQ23
MR-C20A
HA-ME23
MR-J20MA
HC-MF23
MR-J2-20A
SGME-A5BF12
SGDE-A5BP
SGM-A5B312
SGDA-A5BP
SGME-A5AF12
SGDE-A5AP
SGM-A5A312
SGDA-A5AP
SGME-01BF12
SGDE-01BP
LJ1H10 (vertical only)
SGM-01B312
SGDA-01BP
LJ1H20
SGME-01AF12
SGDE-01AP
LJ1S20
SGM-01A312
SGDA-01AP
SGME-02BF12
SGDE-02BP
SGM-02B312
SGDA-02BP
SGME-02AF12
SGDE-02AP
SGM-02A312
SGDA-02AP
Compatible model LJ1H10 (horizontal only)
LJ1S10
LJ1H30
LJ1S30
LJ1H10 (horizontal only)
LJ1S10
LJ1H10 (vertical only)
LJ1H20
LJIS20
LJ1H30
LJ1S30
LJ1H10 (horizontal only)
LJ1S10
LJ1H30
LJ1S30
Series
Electric Actuator
LJ1
Nonstandard Motor Mounting Dimensions Series LJ1 H/S 10 Housing
19.2
C
Motor mounting dimensions
30
72
60
B
A
A
B
Section BB
Manufacturer
Mitsubishi Yaskawa
Matsushita
Thread size
M4 x 0.7
M3 x 0.5
Effective thread length (mm)
8
6
Quantity
2
4
PCD
46
45
32.5
Thread
Coupling
PCD
Motor
øD
9.2
ø8 ø29.5 ø30
Motor mounting area
Note) When mounting the coupling to the motor, mount within the range of the dimensions shown to the left.
Dimensions E
F
Coupling mounting dimensions Note)
Section AA (housing interior)
C
D
E
F
With brake (mm)
101
26
32
8.5
Without brake (mm)
93
19
27.5
17
Series LJ1 H/S 20 24.6
Housing
29
118
105
24.6
Motor mounting dimensions
20.4
23.5
Manufacturer Mitsubishi Yaskawa
55
55
30
B
A
A
B
Thread
35.3
Coupling
PCD
Motor
M3 x 0.5
8
6
Quantity
2
4
PCD
46
45
LJ1H20 PN C LJ1H20SC LJ1S20SC
13
500 to 1000 stroke 700 to 1200 stroke 700 to 1200 stroke
Note 2) When mounting the coupling to the motor, mount within the range of the dimensions shown to the left.
Coupling mounting dimensions Note 2)
Section AA (housing interior)
M4 x 0.7
Effective thread length (mm)
Motor mounting area
ø26 32
Thread size
Note 1) When mounting the coupling to the motor, mount within the limits of the dimensions shown to the left.
ø8 ø30
10.5
Section BB Long stroke type Note 1)
Section BB
Matsushita
Series LJ1 H/S 30 Housing
32
115
Motor mounting dimensions
36.5
89
B
A B
Thread
ø50
Coupling
PCD
37
Section AA (housing interior)
Matsushita
Thread size
M5 x 0.8
M4 x 0.7
Effective thread length (mm)
6
6
Quantity
4
4
PCD
70
70
Motor mounting area
Section BB
35.1 ø12 ø35
13.5
Mitsubishi Yaskawa
Motor
Note) When mounting the coupling to the motor, mount within the range of the dimensions shown to the left.
ø34
A
Manufacturer
8
Coupling mounting dimensions
Note)
43
Series
LJ1
Nonstandard Motors/Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., LTD Drivers Dimensions
168 160
150
ø5.2
5.2 20
3 105
A
Summary of input /output signals (connector CN-1/F) Dimension table Driver model MSD5A1P1E MSD5A3P1E MSD013P1E MSD011P1E MSD023P1E MSD021P1E
A 35
45 60
Signal name Symbol Control signal power supply COM+ Servo ON input SRV-ON Alarm clear input A-CLR Counter clear input CL Gain switching input GAIN Command divider switching input DIV CW drive suppression input CWL CCW drive suppression input CCWL Servo alarm output ALM Positioning completion signal output COIN Speed monitor signal SP
Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Pin No. 12 13 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Signal name Torque monitor signal Control signal power supply
Symbol IM COMGND OZ+ OZCZ CW+ CWCCW+ CCWFG
Z phase output Z phase output Z phase output CW pulse input CW pulse input CCW pulse input CCW pulse input Frame ground
Equipment connection example
With open collector
GND 1 SW ON turns servo ON
3.9kΩ
COM +
CW +
2
220Ω
SRV-ON
Servo ON input SW ON selects secondary gain Gain switching input
5
22
GAIN
220Ω
Alarm clear input CCW drive supression input CW drive supression input
SW ON clears alarm condition SW open suppresses drive SW open suppresses drive
Servo alarm output
3.9kΩ 6
DIV
3
A-CLR
8 7
Vp
Shielding wire
R+220
: Approx. 10mA
AM26LS31 equivalent CW pulse input
23
CCW +
24 CCW pulse input 25 4
SW ON selects secondary multiplication
R 14
CW –
CCW –
Command divider multiplication switching input
Vp-1.5
+ –
CN I/F
CL
Deviation counter clear input
CCWL CWL
50mA MAX 9
ALM Shielding wire
AM26LS31 equivalent 50mA MAX Positioning completion signal
10
OZ +
Z
COIN
AM26LS31 equivalent
19
Z
20
OZ + 14
GND
VDC 12-24V
13
COM –
4.7kΩ – +
VDD 30V MAX 15mA MAX
4.7kΩ 21
– +
CZ
Z
(Pin 14 is GND) 26
FG
CN I/F
44
12
Torque monitor Z out 4.7kΩ
11
Speed monitor Z out 4.7kΩ
IM –
SP
Electric Actuator
Series
LJ1
Nonstandard Motors / Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Drivers Dimensions (without RS-232C option unit) 40
100
1-ø5 hole
5
5
5
130
120
5
5
5
Summary of input /output signals (connector CN -1/ F) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10
Driver model MR-C10A MR-C20A MR-C10A1 MR-C20A1
Equipment connection example
Pin No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20
Signal name Digital output power supply Failure Positioning completion Z phase pulse Interface power supply common Reverse pulse train Reverse pulse train Normal pulse train Normal pulse train
Symbol V+ ALM PF OP SG NP NG PP PG
Symbol SD SG CR LSN LSP V5 SON OPC V24
Signal name Shield Interface power supply common Clear Reverse stroke end Normal stroke end Interface power supply Servo ON Open collector power supply Interface power supply
The regenerating resistor is an externally mounted option.
Compose a sequence which shuts off MC with the alarm.
Power supply Single phase 200VAC (Type A) or Single phase 100VAC (Type A1)
NFB
MC
C
L1
P
Servo amp
L2
MR-C A
U
U
Servomotor HC-PQ
V W
V W
SM
E
or MR-C A1
The length of the cable between the controller and servo amp is 2m or less.
> 24VDC
CN1
EMG Shuts off with the alarm signal when the servo ON signal is OFF.
24V power + supply –
10m or less
11
LG
20
P5
7
LG
7
P5
8 1 9
5
4
2
SHD MDR MD MRR MR LG
P5
8
LG
1 9
5
4
2
SHD MDR MD MRR MR
Plate 16
17
20
(Note 2)
Detector
Connect the shielding wire securely to the ground plate inside the connector.
Note 1) Do not orient diodes incorrectly. If connected backwards, the amp will fail. 2) Wiring for standard cable of less than 10m. When over 10m, four lines each of P5 and LG wire should be connected in parallel. (Maximum 50m)
15 14
SD MDR MD MRR MR
9 10 7
17
PP PG NP NG
8
SD
11
7
12
SG
6 24V, 0.2A or more
V24 RA1
12
(Notes 1 & 4) Failure
2
Reverse stroke end
SG ALM LSN LSP SON SG
Normal stroke end
12
Servo ON
P5
19
3 4 12
1
SG CR
13
V+
OP PF
CN2
(Note 6)
Z
>
V+
3) Signals having the same name should be connected to the same pin on the connector. 4) The failure (ALM) signal is ON under normal conditions when there is no alarm. When it goes OFF (when an alarm is generated), the controller output should be stopped by the sequence program. 5) The LSP and LSN signals do not require wiring, because they are automatically turned ON internally at the time of shipment. (They can also be validated by parameters.) 6) A sequence should be implemented to turn ON the RDY relay after confirming that there is no trouble with the servo (ALM signal is ON).
45
Series
LJ1
Nonstandard Motors / Yaskawa Electric Corporation Drivers Dimensions
2-ø6
160
149
45
6 A
Dimensions Driver model SGDE-A5AP SGDE-A5BP SGDE-01AP SGDE-01BP SGDE-02AP SGDE-02BP
130
B
Summary of input /output signals (connector CN -1/ F) A
B
50
55
65
75
Pin No. Symbol 1 PULS 2 PULS 3 SIGN 4 SIGN 5 CLR 6 CLR 7 BK 8 COIN 10 SGCOM 13 P-IN
Signal name Command pulse input Command pulse input Command code input Command code input Deviation counter clear input Deviation counter clear input Brake interlock signal output Positioning completion signal output 0V External power supply input +10%
Equipment Connection Example
Single phase 200 to 230VAC –15% (50/60HZ ) R 1MCCB
Pin No. 14 15 16 17 18 32 33 34 35 36
Symbol S-ON P-CON P-OT N-OT ALMRST PCO SG ALM SG FG
Signal name Servo ON input P actuation input Normal rotation suppression input Reverse rotation suppression input Alarm reset input PG ouput C phase 0V Servo alarm output 0V Frame ground
For 100V +10% Single phase 100 to 115VAC –15% (50/60HZ )
T
External noise is prevented by the noise filter.
Noise filter
Servo malfunction indicator PL Power supply
OFF
5Ry
1MC
5Ry
ON 1MC
R
1MC
1MC SUP
SGDE servo pack
For power supply switching A surge voltage suppressor should be attached to the electromagnetic contactor and relay. SGDE servomotor 1 Motor U V
T
W
1CN PULS ∗ PULS SIGN ∗ SIGN CLR ∗ CLR
Command pulse (MAX.225/kpps) Deviation counter clear signal (active high)
P P P
Note) +12 to 24V
15
Proportional control (P actuation)
N-LS N-OT
16
P-LS P-OT
17
Reverse drive suppression Normal drive suppression
P-LS Open for normal drive suppression
3Ry ALM RST
3Ry ON for alarm release
18
5mA
M
4
Be sure to ground. Class 3 ground Ground resistor 100Ω or less
PG
Be sure to treat the shielding wire terminals.
4.7kΩ
P-CON
2Ry ON for proportional control N-LS Open for reverse drive suppression
2CN
SV-ON
0V 2Ry
3
Incremental encoder
13 14
1Ry
1Ry ON for servo ON
1 150Ω 2 3 4 5 6
2
Servo ON
Alarm reset
30VDC 50mA or less With servo alarm 5Ry is OFF
+12 to 24V 0V
At completion of positioning 8Ry is ON At start of holding brake operation 4Ry is OFF
5Ry 1ALM ALM-SG 8Ry COIN SG-COM 4Ry BK
34 35
Servo alarm
8 10
Positioning completion
7
Brake interlock Note) PCO
32
SG
33
C phase output open collector
36
SG 0V FG
46
Notes) 1 The capacity of each output circuit is 30VDC, 50mA or less. 2 The signal input line P indicates a twisted pair wire. 3 The 24V power supply should be arranged by the customer.
Series LJ1
Order Made Specifications Stepping Motor/DC Servomotor Specifications Compatibility for both stepping motor and DC servomotor.
Example) Combination of Series LJ1H10 and stepping motor Stepping motor
Example) Combination of Series LJ1H20 and DC servomotor DC servo motor
Note) When using a stepping motor or a DC servomotor, take note that there may be differences in the specifications. Please inquire regarding details. Clean room, special thread and other order made specifications can also be arranged.
47
Series LC1 Dedicated Controller
Uniaxial Type
with Built-in AC Servo-driver
49
Series
LC1
Typical Equipment Configurations Teaching box
Dedicated communication cable
Actuator
Controller setup software
CN4
∗ Exclusive controller setup software (optional) is required.
CN5
CN3
Teaching box
Dedicated communication cable
Actuator Controller setup software
CN4
CN1
CN5 CN2
Controlled by general-purpose input/output
CN3 Solenoid valve
Air cylinder Solenoid valve
Vacuum ejector Air gripper
50
Operating panel
Dedicated Controller
Series
LC1
Teaching box
Dedicated communication cable
Actuator Controller setup software
CN4
CN1
CN5
Programmable logic controller (PLC)
CN2
Controlled by general-purpose input/output CN3
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve Air cylinder
Vacuum ejector Air gripper
51
Uniaxial Electric Actuator
LC1 Uniaxial Type
Dedicated Controller
Series
with Bult-in AC Servo-driver
How to Order
LC1
1 B 1H 1
N 3 Mounting bracket
Number of axes 1
3 5
1 axis
Actuator Classification B
Series LJ1 (incremental)
Mounting
M3 M5 Note 1)
N: T-nut mounting
L: T-bracket mounting
Adaptable actuators Symbol Motor capacity
1H
50W
2H
100W
3H 1S 2S 3S 1M 2M 3M 1VH Note 1) 1VB Note 1) 2VF Note 1) 2VA Note 1) 3VA Note 1)
200W 50W 100W 200W 50W 100W 200W 100W 100W 100W 100W 200W
Caution Note 1)
Compatible actuator models LJ1H101B Ball screw LJ1H202A High rigidity direct acting guide LJ1H202C Without brake LJ1H303D LJ1S101SC LJ1S202SC LJ1S303SE LJ1H101SC LJ1H202SC LJ1H303SC LJ1H102H-K LJ1H102B-K LJ1H202F-K LJ1H202A-K LJ1H303A-K
Slide screw Slider guide Slide screw High rigidity direct acting guide Ball screw High rigidity direct acting guide With brake
LC1-1B1V Contact SMC regarding a LC1-1B2V regenerative absorption unit LC1-1B3V which must be considered for these models depending on the operating conditions.
Power supply 1 2 Note 2)
100/110VAC 50/60Hz 200/220VAC 50/60Hz
Note 2) The power supply for model LC1-1B3H2 is 200VAC, 50/60Hz.
52
Note 1) This controller includes the accessories listed below. LC1-1- /Either T-nuts or T-brackets for mounting LC1-1-1000/Controller connector LC1-1-2000/Controller connector
Note) The following options are necessary for operating and setting this controller. LC1-1-S1 (PC-98 (MS-DOS) edition LC1-1-W1 (Windows 95 edition) and LC1-1-R (dedicated communication cable) or LC1-1-T1- (Teaching box) are required. For ordering information, refer to the option part numbers on page 62.
Dedicated Controller
Series LC1
Performance/Specifications
General specifications Model
Item
LC1-1B1
LC1-1B2
100V/110VAC±10% 50/60Hz
Power supply
200V/220VAC±10% 50/60Hz (LC1-1B3H2 is 200VAC±10%) 5mA or less
Leakage current
80 x 120 x 244mm
Dimensions
2.2kg
Weight
Single unit installation type (resin housing)
Housing type
Actuator control Model LC1-1B1H LC1-1B2H LC1-1B3H LC1-1B1M LC1-1B2M LC1-1B3M LC1-1B1V LC1-1B2V LC1-1B3V LC1-1B1S LC1-1B2S LC1-1B3S
Item
Compatible actuator model
LJ1H101NB LJ1H202NA LJ1H303ND LJ1H102 LJ1H202 LJ1H303 LJ1H101SC LJ1H202SC LJ1H303SE LJ1S101SC LJ1S202SC LJ1H303SC LJ1H101PB LJ1H202PA LJ1H303PD -K -K -K
Compatible guide Motor capacity Operating temperature range Electric energy
High rigidity direct acting guide with brake
High rigidity direct acting guide 50W
100W
5 to 50°C 180VA
Control system
300VA
200W 5 to 40°C 640VA
50W
100W
5 to 50°C 180VA
200W
100W
5 to 50°C
5 to 40°C
300VA
640VA
100W
300VA
200W
Slider guide 50W
5 to 50°C
5 to 40°C
300VA
640VA
100W
100VA
200W 5 to 40°C
300VA
640VA
AC software servo/PTP control
Position detection system
Incremental encoder
Home position return function Maximum positioning point setting
With magnet switch as adjacent switch, and encoder Z phase signal as home position signal. Home position return direction is selectable.
1008 points (when step designation is actuated)
Addressing
Absolute and incremental used in combination
Position designation range
0.00mm to 4000.00mm
Speed designation range
1mm/s to 2500mm/s
Acceleration/deceleration designation range
Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration 1mm/s2 to 9800mm/s2
Note) There are cases in which the position, speed and acceleration designations are not realized, depending upon the actuator that is connected and the operating conditions.
Programming Item
Performance/Specifications
Means of programming
Exclusive controller setup software (LC1-1-S1/LC1-1-W1) and exclusive teaching box (LC1-1-T1-)
Communication method
Dedicated communication cable
Functions
Programming, Operation, Monitor, Test, Alarm reset
Number of programs
8 programs
Number of steps
1016 steps (127 steps x 8 programs)
Operating configuration Item
Performance/Specifications
Operating methods
Operation by PLC, operating panel, etc. via control terminal; Operation by PC (controller setup software); Operation by teaching box
Summary of operations Program batch execution (program designated operation), Step designated execution (position movement, point designated operation) Test run functions
Program test, Step No. designated operation, JOG operation, Input/output operation
Monitor functions
Executed program indication, Input/output monitor
Peripheral device control Item
Performance/Specifications
General-purpose input
6 point, photo-coupler insulation, 24VDC, 5mA
General-purpose output Control commands
6 point, open collector output, 35VDC, 80mA/1 point Ouput ON/OFF, Input condition wait, Condition jump, Time limit input wait
Safety Items Item
Performance/Specifications
Protection functions
Over current, Over load, Over speed, Encoder error, Abnormal driver temperature, Drive power supply cut-off, Communication error, Battery error, Abnormal parameter, Limit out
53
Series
LC1
Mounting of Controller Mounting of the controller is performed by means of the two T-grooves provided on the bottom surface. Mounting is possible from above or below using the special T-nuts or T-brackets. Refer to page 63 for further details.
Controller model
Mounting screws
Mounting bracket Ass'y
LC1-1B-N3
M3 x 0.5
LC1-1-N3
LC1-1B-N5
M5 x 0.8
LC1-1-N5
LC1-1B-L3
M3
LC1-1-L3
Note) This controller comes with either the T-nuts or T-brackets as accessories.
LC1-1B-L5
M5
LC1-1-L5
Mounting with T-nuts
Mounting with T-bracket 90
25 25 6±1 f 5± 1 f or L5 or L3
T-nut
T-bracket
Ma
x.
21
8t
oM
in.
15
54
8
90
Dedicated Controller
Series LC1
Dimensions LC1-1BH LC1-1BS LC1-1BM
CN5 motor power line (Molex 6P) CN4 encoder signal line (Halfpitch 20P)
TB1 power supply terminal CN2 general-purpose input/output (Halfpitch 20P) CN1 control terminal (Halfpitch 26P)
LINIAR
ACTUATOR
CONSTRUCTION
SYSTEM
90
SMC
38 80
17
29
CONTROLLER
Interface cover
12.5
29
120
42.5
35.5
23
Indicator light
12.5 CN3 connector (D-sub 9P)
75
244
Mounting bracket
196
24
24
LC1-1BV
CN2 general-purpose input/output (Halfpitch 20P) CN1 control terminal (Halfpitch 26P)
23
CN4 encoder signal line (Halfpitch 20P) Indicator light
CN4
SMC
CN5
LINIAR
ACTUATOR
CONSTRUCTION
90 120
42.5
35.5
Compatibility indicator
CN6 regenerative absorption unit connection terminal (Molex 2P) TB1 power supply terminal CN5 motor power line (Molex 6P)
SYSTEM
38 80
29
17
19
23
CONTROLLER
CN6
12.5 75
Interface cover
12.5
CN3 connector (D-sub 9P) Mounting bracket
244
24
196
24
55
Series
LC1
Series LC1/Operating Part Names
Encoder/Limit switch signal connector: CN4
Control terminal: CN1
General-purpose input/output: CN2
Motor power connector: CN5 Power supply terminal: TB
Connector: CN3
Controller Command Setting List Actuator Control Commands
Movement Setting
Parameter value
Function
Mnemonic
Absolute movement command
MOVA
Address (speed)
Incremental movement command
MOVI
± Movement (speed)
Acceleration setting command
ASET
Acceleration
Classification
I/O Control Commands Classification Output control
Input wait
Function
Mnemonic
Parameter value
Output ON command
O-SET
General-purpose output No.
Output OFF command
O-RES
General-purpose output No.
Output reversal command
O-NOT
General-purpose output No.
AND output wait command
I-AND
General-purpose input No., State
OR input wait command
I-OR
General-purpose input No., State
AND input time out jump command
T-AND
General-purpose input No., State (P-No.) label
OR input time out jump command
T-OR
General-purpose input No., State (P-No.) label
AND input time out subroutine call command
C-AND
General-purpose input No., State (P-No.) label
OR input time out subroutine call command
C-OR
General-purpose input No., State (P-No.) label
AND input condition jump command
J-AND
General-purpose input No., State (P-No.) label
OR input condition jump command
J-OR
General-purpose input No., State (P-No.) label
Function
Mnemonic
Parameter value
Unconditional jump command
JMP
(P-No.) label
Subroutine call command
CALL
(P-No.) label
Subroutine end declaration
RET
Loop start command
FOR
Loop end command
NEXT
End
Program end declaration
END
Timer
Timer command
TIM
Input wait with time out function
Condition jump
Program Control Commands Classification Jump Subroutine
Loop
56
Loop frequency
Timer amount
Dedicated Controller
Series LC1
Series LC1 Control Terminal: CN1
Control Terminal: CN1
Terminal to perform actuator operation (connects PLC and operating panel) +24V
1
CN1. Control terminal list Terminal +24V
Pin No. Description (1,14)
SET-UP
(2)
RUN
(15)
Pro-No.bit1
(17)
Pro-No.bit2
(5)
Pro-No.bit3
(18)
Stp-No.bit1
(6)
Stp-No.bit2
(19)
Stp-No.bit3
(7)
Stp-No.bit4
(20)
Stp-No.bit5
(8)
Stp-No.bit6
(21)
Stp-No.bit7
(9)
HOLD STOP ALARM RESET
(3) (16) (4)
Common
14 2
Content
15
The positive common of the input terminal.
3
Starting The terminal which performs setup preparation operations (actuator starting preparation).
16
The terminal which performs program start.
4
The terminal which designates the Program program to be executed. Can designate designation 8 types of programs with a total of 3 bits. (a combination of 1.2.4)
17
Starting
<1>
5 18 6 19 7
The terminal which designates the step to be executed. Used when executing Step designation steps (position movement). (a combination of 1. 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. 64.)
20 8 21
SET-UP
GND
RUN HOLD STOP ALARM RESET PRO-NO BIT 1
Control input
BIT 2 BIT 3 STP-NO BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7
9 22 10
Temporary Temporarily stops the program run by means of the ON input. stop Emergency stop Performs an emergency stop when (nonlogical input) ON input stops. Alarm release
23
<2>
11 24 12
Releases the alarm being generated by means of the ON input.
25
SET-ON READY BUSY ALARM
Control output
COM COM
13 26
Output terminals Terminal
Pin No. Description
Content
READY
(23)
Indicates ability to perform control System ready signal terminal input and communication via the dedicated communication cable when ON.
SET-ON
(10)
Start readiness signal
BUSY
(11)
Indicates operation in progress when ON. Operating ON when program is being executed and signal when returning to the home position.
Indicates that the SET-UP operation (start ready operation: return to home position after servo ON) is complete when ON. The state in which the program can be run.
Control Terminal: CN2
1 11
ALARM COM
(24)
Alarm output
(12, 25) Common
When this signal is off, an alarm is being generated for the actuator/controller. The output terminal common.
2 12
<1>
3 13 4 14
COM
+24V
COM NO.0
GND
NO.1 NO.2 NO.3
General-purpose input
NO.4 NO.5
5 15
NO.0
6
<2>
16
NO.1
7 17
NO.2
8 18
NO.3
General-purpose output
9 19
NO.4
10 20
NO.5
57
Series
LC1
Series LC1 Timing for READY signal generation immediately after turning on power
Timing for temporary stop during operation HOLD
Power
ON OFF
max 100ms
Speed
READY ON OFF After turning the power on, the internal control power comes on, and after self diagnosis the READY signal goes ON.
ON OFF
max 25ms max 30ms
V O
max 10ms BUSY
ON OFF BUSY-OFF timing is controlled by actuator deceleration.
Timing for home position return SET -UP
ON OFF
BUSY
ON OFF
SET -ON
ALARM ON -RESET OFF
max 5ms
Speed
max 20ms
V O
Speed
max 15ms Home position return speed
Creeping speed
ON OFF
P-NO ON S-NO OFF RUN
BUSY
ON OFF
ON OFF
max 25ms
V O ON OFF BUSY-OFF timing is controlled by actuator deceleration.
Timing for program/step execution SET -UP
Timing for stop by ALARM-RESET during operation
After confirming that the SET-UP signal is ON, the RUN signal should be turned ON. Selection
Timing for emergency stop during operation STOP
ON OFF
SET -ON
ON OFF
max 10ms
max 10ms
Selection should be made before the RUN signal goes ON. ON ALARM OFF After confirming that the BUSY signal is OFF, the RUN signal should be turned ON.
Speed
V O
BUSY
ON OFF
max 15ms
max 10ms BUSY
ON OFF
Speed
max 60ms
V O
Response time with respect to controller input signals Timing for alarm reset ALARM ON -RESET OFF ALARM
ON OFF
max 5ms
The following requisites exist for delay of response with respect to controller input signals. 1) Scanning delay of the controller input signal. 2) Delay by the input signal analysis computation. 3) Delay of command analysis processing. Points (1) and (2) above apply to delay with respect to the SET-ON, ALARM-RESET and STOP signals. Points (1), (2) and (3) above apply to delay with respect to cancellation of the RUN and HOLD signals. When signals are applied to the controller by means of a PLC, the PLC processing delay and the controller input signal scan delay should be considered, and the signal state should be maintained for 50ms or longer. It is recommended that the input signal state be initialized with the response signal to the input signal as a condition.
58
Electric Actuator
Series
LC1
Controller Setup Software (1) Software for operating the LC1 series controller is provided in the PC-98 (MS-DOS) edition. Features: • Reading and saving of parameters and programs. • JOG teaching when creating programs. • Easy confirmation of program operation with test mode. • Diagnosis of I/O and observation of operating conditions with task monitor. • Support of all controller functions.
PC-98 (MS-DOS) Edition Model: LC1-1-S1
Operating environment Computer
PC-9821, PC-98, PC-9801 with 80286 or higher CPU. PC-H98 series and compatible machines (except for high resolution mode)
OS Memory Disk drive
MS-DOS Ver 3.3 or higher 640KB or more 1MB capacity 3.5 inch floppy disk drive
∗ MS-DOS is a registered trade mark of the Microsoft Corporation. ∗ PC-98 Series is a registered trade mark of NEC Corporation. ∗ The dedicated communications cable (LC1-1-R) is required when using this software. ∗ Available only in Japanese edition.
Screen example
59
Series
LC1
Controller Setup Software (2) Windows edition controller setup software includes all of the functions of PC98 (MS-DOS) edition software, and the following functions have also been added. • Direct teaching. • Program printing. • Batch editing and sending/receiving of all programs. • Batch management and multiple saving of parameters and programs.
Windows Edition Model: LC1-1-W1
Operating environment Computer
A model with a Pentium 75MHz or faster CPU, and able to fully operate Windows 95.
OS Memory Disk drive
Windows 95 16MB or more 5MB of disk space required
∗ Windows is a registered trade mark of the Microsoft Corporation. ∗ Pentium is a domestic trade mark of the Intel Corporation. ∗ PC-98 Series is a registered trade mark of NEC Corporation. The dedicated communications cable (LC1-1-R∗∗∗) is required when using this software. This software cannot be used with Windows 3.1.
Screen example Contact SMC for further details related to the controller setup software.
60
Dedicated Teaching Box
Series
LC1
Dedicated Teaching Box
Series LC1-1-T1
The new teaching box makes the electric actuator and controller even easier to use.
S T O P
A C C T U O A N T T O R R O P L O L &C E W O R N E S R T R U C T IO N
S Y S T E M
• Interactive input display • Programming with the same language as PC software
c
M AR AL
H /B OL S D
L
UP
R
L
WN DO
T
EN
DE C MO/ES
Able to execute operations such as programming, test runs and parameter changes, which up until now have been performed from a PC.
∗ The special cable is packed with the teaching box. (2 to 5m)
61
Series
LC1
How to Order
Performance/Specifications
LC1 - 1 - T1 - 0
General Specifications LC1-1-T1-0
Cable length 2 3 4 5
2m 3m 4m 5m
Power supply
Supplied from LC1
Dimensions (mm)
169 x 76 x 20
Weight ( g )
158
Case type
Resin case
Display unit
46 x 55 liquid crystal screen
Operating unit
Keyswitches, LED indicators
Cable length
2m, 3m, 4m, 5m
Basic Performance Performance Compatible controller
LC1 (all models)
Operating temperature range
5 to 50°C
Communication method
RS232C
Functions
Programming, Parameter change, Setup, Operation, JOG operation, Monitor, Alarm reset, JOG Teaching
Monitor functions
Movement position, Movement speed
Protection functions
Over current, Over load, Over speed, Encoder error, Abnormal driver temperature, Abnormal drive power, Communication error, Battery error, Limit out, Abnormal driver parameter, RAM malfunction
Protection function indicator
Alarm code
Dimensions
LCD screen
Communication cable connector
STOP key
46
MODE /ESC
L HOLD /BS
ALARM
Warning light (ALARM)
Hanger ring
62
20
Power indicator light (POWER)
26
UP
DOWN
R
ENT
STOP
11
POWER
ACTUATOR & CONSTRUCTION SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
Lc
SMC
55
76
170
Dedicated Controller
Series
LC1
Series LC1/Options T-nuts & T-brackets for mounting
Dedicated communication cable
Be certain to use when mounting the controller.
The connector which connects the controller and PC.
Note) The controller unit includes either T-nuts or T-brackets. Note) Pay attention to the shape of the connector on the PC.
T-nuts (weight 10.0g) Dedicated communication cable (IBM PC/AT compatible computer)
M
17.5
Model
7.5
Model
M
LC1-1-N3
M3 x 0.5
LC1-1-N5
M5 x 0.8
LC1-1-RC Cable length 02 - 2m 04 - 4m 03 - 3m 05 - 5m
18 PC
Controller
T-brackets Model
LC1-1-L5 (weight 16.0g)
Model
LC1-1-L3 (weight 15.5g)
M5
17.5
17.5
11
12 7.5
21
Cable length: 2 to 5m
M3
7.5
Dedicated communication cable (D-Sub) (for NEC PC-98 Series) 20 29
30
Model
LC1-1-RD Cable length 02 - 2m 04 - 4m 03 - 3m 05 - 5m
PC
Controller connector
Controller
The connector used for CN1 (control terminal) and CN2 (generalpurpose input/output). These are each Halfpitch types.
Cable length: 2 to 5m
Note) The controller unit includes a controller connector for use with CN1 and CN2.
CN1: Control terminal Model
LC1-1-1000
User connector (CN1: Control terminal) Model LC1-1-1050
Dedicated communication cable (Halfpitch) (for NEC PC-98 Series) Model
Cable length 02 - 2m 04 - 4m 03 - 3m 05 - 5m
0.5m Cable is connected to LC1-1-1000.
10326-52A0-008 Halfpitch hood (26P) Made by 3M
PC
10126-3000VE Halfpitch plug (26P) Made by 3M
LC1-1-2000
Controller
Cable length: 2 to 5m
CN2: General-purpose input/output terminal Model
LC1-1-RH
∗ PC-98 Series is a registered trade mark of NEC Corporation.
User connector (CN2: General-purpose input/output terminal) Model LC1-1-2050
0.5m 10320-52A0-008 Halfpitch hood (20P) Made by 3M
Cable is connected to LC1-1-2000.
10120-3000VE Halfpitch plug (20P) Made by 3M
63
Electric Actuator
Catalog Terminology Description
Content
Address
The absolute location assigned by the absolute coordinate system
Addressing
The indication system for assigning the amount of movement to the actuator movement command Absolute (absolute coordinate system) or incremental (relative coordinate system/movement amount indication)
Absolute
The absolute coordinate system comprises coordinates which indicate absolute location based on the actuator's home position
Incremental
The incremental (relative) coordinate system comprises coordinates which indicate the amount of actuator table movement
AC servomotor
A servomotor which is turned by applying alternating current to a stationary coil Its special feature is the absence of brushes and commutators which were a disadvantage in DC servomotors
Encoder
The device which detects the rotation position of the motor Broadly divided into absolute and incremental, and classified as optical or magnetic
Slider guide
A simple guide attached to a surface using a special resin
Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration
The acceleration/deceleration applied during a specific movement is constant, with a geometrical locus whereby the relationship of time and speed is expressed as a trapezoidal shape
Driver
A circuit arrangement for turning the motor A separate controller is required for operation
Mnemonic
Commands used to describe the controller program
Parameter
An established value which regulates the operating format stored in the controller, the specifications of the connected actuator, etc.
General-purpose input/output
The terminal which is controlled by the program
PTP control
Movement control from point to point
Pitching (moment)
The moment which acts longitudinally when an object is moving linearly
Ball screw
Changes rotating movement to linear movement when its screw axis and nut make rolling contact through balls Ground ball screw, rolled ball screw
Matrix editor
The function (editor) which creates the controller program by means of the controller setup software, tabular format (matrix)
Monitor function
The function within the controller setup software which can observe the state of the controller
Yawing (moment)
The moment which acts laterally when an object is moving linearly
Limit switch
The switch which senses movement beyond the normal stroke of the actuator
Rolling (moment)
The moment which acts in the direction of rotation when an object is moving linearly
Deenergized operation type electromagnetic brake
An electromagnetic brake which operates when current is not applied.
64
Series LJ1
Safety Instructions These safety instructions are intended to prevent a hazardous situation and/or equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard by a label of "Caution", "Warning" or "Danger". To ensure safety, be sure to observe ISO 10218 Note 1), JIS 8433 Note 2) and other safety practices.
Caution : Operator error could result in injury or equipment damage. Warning : Operator error could result in serious injury or loss of life. Danger :
In extreme conditions, there is a possible result of serious injury or loss of life.
Note 1) ISO 10218: Manipulating industrial robots - Safety Note 2) JIS 8433: Robot safety axiom
Warning 1. The compatibility of electric actuators is the responsibility of the person who designs the system or decides its specifications. Since the products specified here are used in various operating conditions, their compatibility for the specific system must be based on specifications or after analysis and/or tests to meet your specific requirements.
2. Only trained personnel should operate this equipment. Electric actuators can be dangerous if an operator is unfamiliar with them. Assembly, handling or repair of systems using electric actuators should be performed by trained and experienced operators.
3. Do not service machinery/equipment or attempt to remove components until safety is confirmed. 1.Inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after confirmation of safe locked-out control positions. 2.When equipment is to be removed, confirm the safety process as mentioned above, and shut off the power supply for this equipment. 3.Before machinery/equipment is restarted, confirm that safety measures are in effect.
4. Contact SMC if the product is to be used in any of the following conditions: 1.Conditions and environments beyond the given specifications, or if product is used outdoors. 2.Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, medical equipment, food and beverages, or safety equipment. 3.An application which has the possibility of having negative effects on people, property, or animals, requiring special safety analysis.
65
LJ1 Actuator Precautions 1 Series
Be sure to read before handling.
Precautions on Design
Warning 1. There is a possibility of dangerous sudden action by actuators if sliding parts of machinery are twisted due to external forces, etc. In such cases, human injury may occur; e.g., by catching hands or feet in the machinery, or damage to the machinery itself may occur. Therefore, the machine should be designed to avoid such dangers.
2. A protective cover is recommended to minimize the risk of human injury. If a stationary object and moving parts of a cylinder are in close proximity, human injury may occur. Design the structure to avoid contact with the human body.
3. Securely tighten all stationary parts and connected parts of electric actuators so that they will not become loose. Avoid use in locations where direct vibration or impact shock, etc. will be applied to the body of the actuator.
4. In cases where dangerous conditions may result from power failure or malfunction of the product, safety equipment should be installed to prevent damage to machinery and human injury. Consideration must also be given to drop prevention with regard to suspension equipment and lifting mechanisms. 5. Consider possible loss of power sources. Measures should be taken to protect against human injury and machinery damage in the event that there is a loss of air pressure, electricity or hydraulic power.
6. Consider emergency stops. Design so that human injury and/or damage to machinery and equipment will not be caused when machinery is stopped by a safety device under abnormal conditions, a power outage or a manual emergency stop.
7. Consider the action when operation is restarted after an emergency stop or abnormal stop. Design the machinery so that human injury or equipment damage will not occur upon restart of operation.
66
Precautions on Operation
Caution 1. In order to ensure proper operation be certain to read the instruction manual carefully. As a rule, handling or usage/operation other than that contained in the instruction manual are prohibited. 2. This actuator can be used within its allowable range with a direct load applied, but when connected to a load having an external guide mechanism careful alignment is necessary. The longer the stroke, the greater the amount of variation in the shaft center, and therefore, a method of connection which can absorb the displacement should be considered. 3. Since the bearing parts and parts surrounding the feed screw are adjusted at the time of shipment, unnecessary movement of the adjusted parts should be avoided. 4. This actuator can be used without lubrication. In the event that lubrication is applied, a lithium family grease (JIS No. 2) should be used. 5. If the actuator will be used in an atmosphere where it will be exposed to cutting chips, dust, cutting oil (water, liquids), etc., a cover or other protection should be provided. 6. Operate with cables secured. Avoid bending cables at sharp angles where they enter the actuator, and also be sure that cables do not move easily.
Selection
Warning 1. Confirm the specifications. The products in this catalog should not be used outside the range of specifications, as this may cause damage or malfunction, etc. (Refer to specifications)
Caution 1. Confirmation of actuator operation should first be performed at low speed. Operation at normal speeds should be performed only after confirming that no problems exist. Mounting
Caution 1. Do not use until you verify that the equipment can operate properly. 2. The product should be mounted and operated after thoroughly reading the instruction manual and understanding its contents. 3. Do not dent, scratch or cause other damage to the body and table mounting surfaces. This may cause a loss of parallelism in the mounting surfaces, rattling in the guide unit, an increase in sliding resistance or other problems.
4. When attaching a work load, do not apply strong impact shock or a large moment, etc. If an outside force exceeding the allowable moment is applied, this may cause rattling in the guide unit, an increase in sliding resistance or other problems.
5. When connecting a load having an external support or guide mechanism, be sure to select a suitable connection method and perform careful alignment. 6. Take care that cables do not get caught by actuator movement.
LJ1 Actuator Precautions 2 Series
Be sure to read before handling.
Mounting
Caution 7. Do not use in locations where there is vibration or impact shock. Contact SMC before using in this kind of environment, as damage may result. 8. Give adequate consideration to the disposition of wiring, etc. at the time of mounting. If wiring is forced into unreasonable positions, this may lead to breaks in the wiring and result in malfunction. 9. Avoid use in the following environments. 1. Locations with a lot of debris or dust, or where cutting chips may enter. 2. Locations where the ambient temperature is outside the range of 5 to 40°C. 3. Locations where ambient humidity is outside the range of 10 to 90%. 4. Locations where corrosive or combustible gases are generated. 5. Locations where strong magnetic or electric fields are generated. 6. Locations where direct vibration or impact shock, etc. will be applied to the actuator unit.
Grounding
Caution 1. Be sure to carry out grounding in order to ensure the noise tolerance of the actuator. 2. Dedicated grounding should be used as much as possible. Grounding should be to a type 3 ground. (Ground resistance of 100Ω or less.) 3. Ground wires should have a cross sectional area of 2mm² or more. Grounding should be as close as possible to the actuator, and the ground wires should be as short as possible. 4. In the unlikely event that malfunction is caused by the ground, it may be disconnected.
Power Supply
Caution 1. In cases where voltage variations greatly exceed the prescribed voltage, a constant voltage transformer should be used. 2. A power supply should be used that has low noise between lines and between power and ground. In cases where noise is high, an isolation transformer should be used. 3. Wiring should be performed by separating the controller power supply from the general-purpose input/output and control terminal interface power supply (24VDC). 4. In order to minimize voltage drop in the 100V/200VAC wiring and the 24VDC wiring, use large diameter wire of ø1.0 or greater, and connect at the minimum possible distance. 5. Avoid bundling the 100V/200VAC lines together with, or routing them near, the general-purpose input/output lines, control terminal output lines and encoder signal lines. They should be separated by at least 100mm if possible. 6. Connect lightning protection varistors (surge absorbers) in order to protect against surge from lightning. When doing this, separate the lightning surge absorber ground from the controller ground.
Operating Environment
Caution 1. Do not use in environments where there is a danger of corrosion. 2. In dirty areas, such as dusty locations or where water, oil, etc. splash on the equipment, take suitable measures to protect the rod. 3. Do not use in an environment where there is a strong magnetic field.
Maintenance
Warning 1. Maintenance should be done according to the procedures indicated in the instruction manual. If handled improperly, malfunction and damage of machinery or equipment may occur.
2. Demounting of equipment. When equipment is to be demounted, first confirm that measures are in place to prevent dropping or runaway of driven objects, etc., and then proceed after shutting off the electric power. When starting up again, proceed with caution after confirming that conditions are safe.
67
LJ1 Auto Switch Common Precautions 1 Be sure to read before handling. Series
Refer to the main catalog sections for detailed precautions on each series.
Design & Selection
Warning 1. Confirm the specifications. Read the specifications carefully and use this product appropriately. The product may be damaged or malfunction if it is used outside the range of specifications of current load, voltage, temperature or impact.
2. Wiring should be kept as short as possible. Although wire length should not affect switch function, use a wire 100m or shorter.
3. Do not use a load that generates surge voltage. Although a zener diode for surge protection is connected at the output side of a solid state auto switch, damage may still occur if the surge is applied repeatedly. When a load, such as a relay or solenoid, which generates surge is directly driven, use a type of switch with a builtin surge absorbing element.
4. Ensure sufficient clearance for maintenance activities. When designing an application, be sure to allow sufficient clearance for maintenance and inspections.
68
Mounting & Adjustment
Warning 1. Do not drop or bump. Do not drop, bump or apply excessive impacts (1000m/s² or more) while handling. Although the body of the switch may not be damaged, the inside of the switch could be damaged and cause a malfunction.
2. Do not carry an actuator by the auto switch lead wires. Never carry a cylinder by its lead wires. This may not only cause broken lead wires, but it may cause internal elements of the switch to be damaged by the stress.
3. Mount switches using the proper fastening torque. When a switch is tightened beyond the range of fastening torque, the mounting screws, mounting bracket or switch may be damaged. On the other hand, tightening below the range of fastening torque may allow the switch to slip out of position.
4. Mount a switch at the center of the operating range. Adjust the mounting position of an auto switch so that the magnet stops at the center of the operating range (the range in which a switch is ON). If mounted at the end of the operating range (around the borderline of ON and OFF), operation will be unstable.
LJ1 Auto Switch Common Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. Series
Refer to the main catalog sections for detailed precautions on each series.
Wiring
Warning
Operating Environment
Warning
1. Avoid repeatedly bending or stretching lead wires.
1. Never use in an atmosphere of explosive gases.
Broken lead wires will result from applying bending stress or stretching force to the lead wires.
The structure of auto switches is not intended to prevent explosion. Never use in an atmosphere with an explosive gas since this may cause a serious explosion.
2. Confirm proper insulation of wiring. Be certain that there is no faulty wiring insulation (contact with other circuits, ground fault, improper insulation between terminals, etc.). Damage may occur due to excess current flow into a switch.
3. Do not wire with power lines or high voltage lines. Wire separately from power lines or high voltage lines, avoiding parallel wiring or wiring in the same conduit with these lines. Control circuits, including auto switches, may malfunction due to noise from these other lines.
4. Do not allow short circuit of loads. All models of PNP output type switches do not have built-in short circuit prevention circuits. If loads are short circuited, the switches will be instantly damaged. Take special care to avoid reverse wiring with the brown (red) power supply line and the black (white) output line on 3 wire type switches.
5. Avoid incorrect wiring. If connections are reversed (power supply line + and power supply line -) on a 3 wire type switch, the switch will be protected by a protection circuit. However, if the power supply line (+) is connected to the blue (black) wire and the power supply line (-) is connected to the black (white) wire, the switch will be damaged.
Maintenance
Warning 1. Perform the following maintenance periodically in order to prevent possible danger due to unexpected auto switch malfunction. 1) Secure and tighten switch mounting screws. If screws become loose or the mounting position is dislocated, retighten them after readjusting the mounting position. 2) Confirm that there is no damage to lead wires. To prevent faulty insulation, replace switches or repair lead wires, etc., if damage is discovered.
2. Do not use in an area where a magnetic field is generated. Auto switches will malfunction or magnets inside cylinders will become demagnetized.
3. Do not use in an environment where the auto switch will be continually exposed to water. Do not use switches in applications where continually exposed to water splash or spray. Poor insulation or swelling of the potting resin inside switches may cause malfunction.
Operating Environment
Warning 7. Avoid accumulation of iron powder or close contact with magnetic substances. When a large amount of ferrous powder such as machining chips or spatter is accumulated, or a magnetic substance (something attracted by a magnet) is brought into close proximity with an auto switch cylinder, it may cause the auto switch to malfunction due to a loss of the magnetic force inside the cylinder.
Other
Warning 1. Consult SMC concerning water resistance, elasticity of lead wires, and usage at welding sites, etc.
4. Do not use in an environment with oil or chemicals. Consult SMC if auto switches will be used in an environment with coolant, cleaning solvent, various oils or chemicals. If auto switches are used under these conditions for even a short time, they may be adversely affected by improper insulation, malfunction due to swelling of the potting resin, or hardening of the lead wires.
5. Do not use in an environment with temperature cycles. Consult SMC if switches are used where there are temperature cycles other than normal temperature changes, as they may be adversely affected.
6. Do not use in an area where surges are generated. When there are units (solenoid type lifter, high frequency induction furnace, motor, etc.) which generate a large amount of surge in the area around cylinders with solid state auto switches, this may cause deterioration or damage to the switch. Avoid sources of surge generation and disorganized lines.
69
LJ1 Specific Product Precautions Series
Be sure to read before handling.
Mounting
Caution 1. Since the slide bearing type is supported by a resin slide bearing, take particular care to avoid subjecting it to strong impacts or large moment, etc. when mounting the unit. 2. Mount the slide screw type in a horizontal position.
70
Brakes
Caution 1. Since sparks may be generated due to slippage when starting and braking, do not operate this product in environments with oils or combustible gases, etc. where there is a danger of ignition or explosion. 2. This product cannot be used for ordinary braking. 3. This brake is a deenergized operation type designed exclusively for holding and emergency stopping. If used repeatedly for braking under ordinary circumstances, its original function will be degraded within a short time and eventually the brake will no longer disengage. Continued use under these conditions will cause failure such as burning of the brake, loss of braking force or runaway of the electric actuator. 4. Do not allow hands or fingers, etc. to be caught in the mechanism. Even when the actuator is stopped, the armature moves in an axial direction when the power is turned ON and OFF. If this sliding part is touched with the fingers, they may be caught and injured. Be sure the cover is in place before turing the power ON or OFF.
Brakes
Caution 5. Do not touch the brake with bare hands during operation. The surface temperature of the brake unit may rise as high as 90°C to 100°C, due to heat from friction and heat generated by the internal coil. Since burns will result if touched, never allow hands or fingers, etc. to touch the brake unit during operation. The surface may even become hot due to the flow of electric current alone, and therefore, the brake unit should not be touched at any time.
SMC'S GLOBAL MANUFACTURING, DISTRIBUTION AND SERVICE NETWORK
EUROPE
ASIA
NORTH AMERICA
AUSTRIA SMC Pneumatik GmbH. CZECH SMC Czech s.r.o. FRANCE SMC Pneumatique SA GERMANY SMC Pneumatik GmbH HUNGARY SMC Hungary Kft. IRELAND SMC Pneumatics (Ireland) Ltd. ITALY/ROMANIA SMC Italia S.p.A. NETHERLANDS ~ SMC Controls BV. SLOVAKIA SMC Slovakia s.r.o. SLOVENIA SMC Slovenia d.o.c. SPAIN/PORTUGAL SMC Espana, S.A. SWEDEN SMC Pneumatics Sweden AB SWITZERLAND SMC Pneumatik AG. UK SMC Pneumatics (U.K.) Ltd.
CHINA SMC (China) Co., Ltd. HONG KONG SMC Pneumatics (Hong kong) Ltd. INDIA SMC Pneumatics (India) Pvt. Ltd. MALAYSIA SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Sdn. Bhd. PHILIPPINES SMC Pneumatics (Philippines), Inc. SINGAPORE SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Pte. Ltd. SOUTH KOREA SMC Pneumatics Korea Co., Ltd. TAIWAN SMC Pneumatics (Taiwan) Co., Ltd. THAILAND SMC Thailand Ltd.
CANADA SMC Pneumatics (Canada) Ltd. MEXICO SMC Corporation (Mexico) S.A. de C.V. USA SMC Pneumatics Inc.
SOUTH AMERICA ARGENTINA SMC Argentina S.A. BOLIVIA SMC Pneumatics Bolivia S.R.L. CHILE SMC Pneumatics (Chile) S.A. VENEZUELA SMC Neumatica Venezuela S.A.
OCEANIA AUSTRALIA SMC Pneumatics (Australia) Pty. Ltd. NEW ZEALAND SMC Pneumatics (N.Z.) Ltd.
1-16-4 Shimbashi, Minato-ku, Tokyo 105 JAPAN Tel: 03-3502-2740 Fax: 03-3508-2480 1st printing March, 1998
D-SMC.L.A.
P-72 (M)
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
Printed in Japan.
CAT.ES100-44 A
Electric Actuator with Integrated Guide
g n i t a r o p r o Inc
g n i t a l u c r i c Re
e d i u G r a e n i L e p y T e m a r F l Bal
Series LTF
Light-weight, compact electric Frame-type linear guide has one-piece Space saving, light weight
50
33
46
40
60
74
LTF6 work piece mounting section dimensions
LTF8 work piece mounting section dimensions
357.5mm 2.2kg 600mm
412mm 4.6kg 1000mm
Overall length∗ Weight∗ Maximum stroke
∗ Values of the horizontal mounting type with standard motor and 100 mm stroke
Table traveling accuracy
Lead screw Ground ball screw Rolled ball screw
D C
B A Traveling accuracy (mm)
Model
C side against A side
D side against B side
±0.02/200 or less
±0.02/200 or less
±0.02/200 or less
±0.02/200 or less
LTF6 LTF8
Simplified Selection Flow Chart Series
Horizontal mounting specification Series LTF
Brake
Without motor brake
Work load kg
500
25
1000
30
3
specification Series LTF
With motor brake
5 6 10
Features 1
Maximum Positioning speed repeatability mm/s mm
15
50
Vertical mounting
Single Axis Electric Actuator Series
300 500
500 1000 300 500
Lead screw
±0.02
Ground ball screw
±0.05
Rolled ball screw
±0.02
Ground ball screw
±0.05
Rolled ball screw
±0.02
Ground ball screw
±0.05
Rolled ball screw
±0.02
Ground ball screw
±0.05
Rolled ball screw
±0.02
Ground ball screw
±0.05
Rolled ball screw
±0.02
Ground ball screw
±0.05
Rolled ball screw
±0.02
Ground ball screw
±0.05
Rolled ball screw
±0.02
Ground ball screw
±0.05
Rolled ball screw
Guide type
LTF
(AC Servomotor)
Motor type
Standard motor [Tamagawa Seiki Co., Ltd.]
Frame-type linear guide
Non-standard motor Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yaskawa Electric Corporation
Standard motor
Capacity
100W 200W 100W 200W 100W
[Tamagawa Seiki Co., Ltd.]
Frame-type linear guide
Non-standard motor Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yaskawa Electric Corporation
200W 100W 200W
actuator requires small mounting space structure with integrated linear guide and frame
Motor Standard motor [Tamagawa Seiki Co., Ltd.] Non-standard motor [Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.] [Mitsubishi Electric Corporation] [Yasukawa Electric Corporation]
Table
Frame-type linear guide One-piece structure of the linear guide integrated with the frame Martensitic stainless steel
Steel balls (Circulating) Recirculating Steel Balls Standard stroke (mm) and 100
200
400
300
500
Speed (mm/s)
600
to 500
to 390
to 500
to 390
700
800
900
1000
Model
LTF6E PH
Page Standard Non-standard Deflection motor motor
4
36
NH LTF6E
8
40
to 1000
to 890
to 710
to 580
to 480
LTF8F PL
12
44
to 1000
to 890
to 710
to 580
to 480
NL LTF8F
16
48
LTF6E PF
2
34
to 300
to 230
to 300
to 230
NF LTF6E
6
38
to 500
to 440
to 350
to 290
to 240
LTF8F PH
10
42
to 500
to 440
to 350
to 290
to 240
NH LTF8F
14
46
LTF6E PH- K
20
52
to 500
to 390
to 500
to 390
LTF6E NH- K
24
56
to 1000
to 890
to 710
to 580
to 480
PL- K LTF8F
28
60
to 1000
to 890
to 710
to 580
to 480
NL- K LTF8F
32
64
LTF6E PF- K
18
50
to 300
to 230
to 300
to 230
LTF6E NF- K
22
54
to 500
to 440
to 350
to 290
to 240
LTF8F PH- K
26
58
to 500
to 440
to 350
to 290
to 240
NH- K LTF8F
30
62
71
71
Features 2
Electric Actuator with Integrated Guide
Series LTF Series
Motor type
Mounting orientation
Guide type
Horizontal Standard motor Vertical Frame-type linear guide
LTF
Horizontal Non-standard motor Vertical
Lead screw lead mm Ground ball screw Rolled ball screw
Model
6 10 6 10 6 10 6 10
LTF6 LTF8 LTF6 LTF8 LTF6 LTF8 LTF6 LTF8
10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20
6 10 6 10 6 10 6 10
10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20
Page P.2 P.10 P.18 P.26 P.34 P.42 P.50 P.58
Options ——–——————————— P.66 Construction ——–——————————— P.67 Mounting ——–——————————— P.68 Non-standard Motor Mounting ——–——————————— P.69 Deflection Data ——–——————————— P.71
Part Number Designations LTF 6 G E 1 P F F H L
Series 6 Series 8
Motor specification G R Y
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
E F
Nil K
100W 200W
Power supply voltage 1 2 0
X10 Motor specification
6mm 10mm
100V AC 50/60Hz 200V AC 50/60Hz
Cable length
Standard motor Nil X10 Non-standard motor
Brake
2 3 4 5
None
Switch specification
20mm
Motor output
Nil Standard motor
R 2
Lead screw lead
Series 6 8
100
With brake
Lead screw type P Ground ball screw N Rolled ball screw
Without motor
Motor/switch entry direction Nil
Without motor, switch and switch rail
R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
Nil 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
2m 3m 4m 5m Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
The tables above show the definition for each symbol only and cannot be used for actual model selection.
1
Standard Motor
Series LTF6
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
100
ø10mm /6mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF6E 1 PF
Stroke
R 2
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V/110V AC(50/60Hz) 200V/220V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
mm
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
Performance
100
200
500
600
2.2
2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.7
30 300 AC servomotor (100W) Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø10mm, 6mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
LC1-1H2HF- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
L1 (mm)
100 a=1000 a=2000 a=3000 0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
LTF6 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Model Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Load movement direction
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
2
230 ±0.02
Encoder
Switch Controller
400
300
Motor Main parts
300
Standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6EPF Scale: 18% 4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8 (2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
50 30
89.5
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
(20.5)
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable fixing clip
82.5
40
40 42.5
19
32.5
A
Stroke + 95
19 22.5
A 64
Stroke + 169
40 30
Dog fitting for switch
17.5
2
33
5 Work piece mounting reference plane∗
30
10
21.5
60
15
Body mounting reference plane∗
89.5
Pitch = 100
Section AA
(n1-1) x pitch
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6EPF- 100- LTF6EPF- 200- LTF6EPF- 300- LTF6EPF- 400- LTF6EPF- 500- LTF6EPF- 600-
47.5
2 3 4 5 6 7
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
150
0.5
0.6
1.2
2.5
4.5
300
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.6
2.6
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
3
Standard Motor
Series LTF6
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
100
ø10mm /10mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF6E 1 PH
Stroke
R 2
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V/110V AC(50/60Hz) 200V/220V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
mm
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
Performance
100
200
500
600
2.2
2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.7
15 500 AC servomotor (100W) Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø10mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
LC1-1H2HH- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
L1 (mm)
100 a=1000 a=2000 a=3000 0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
LTF6 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Model Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Load movement direction
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
4
390 ±0.02
Encoder
Switch Controller
400
180
Motor Main parts
300
Standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6EPH Scale: 18% 4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8 (2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
50 30
89.5
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
(20.5)
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable fixing clip
82.5
40
40 42.5
19
32.5
A
Stroke + 95
19 22.5
A 64
Stroke + 169
40 30 Dog fitting for switch
17.5
2
33
5 Work piece mounting reference plane∗
30
10
21.5
60
15
Body mounting reference plane∗
89.5
Pitch = 100
Section AA
(n1-1) x pitch
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6EPH- 100- LTF6EPH- 200- LTF6EPH- 300- LTF6EPH- 400- LTF6EPH- 500- LTF6EPH- 600-
47.5
2 3 4 5 6 7
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
250
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.7
2.9
500
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.8
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
5
Standard Motor
Series LTF6
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
100
ø10mm /6mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF6E 1 NF
Stroke
R 2
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V/110V AC(50/60Hz) 200V/220V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
mm
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
Performance
100
200
500
600
2.2
2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.7
30 300 AC servomotor (100W) Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø10mm, 6mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
LC1-1H2HF- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
L1 (mm)
100 a=1000 a=2000 a=3000 0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
LTF6 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Model Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Load movement direction
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
6
230 ±0.05
Encoder
Switch Controller
400
300
Motor Main parts
300
Standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6ENF Scale: 18% 4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8 (2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
50 30
89.5
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
(20.5)
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable fixing clip
82.5
40
40 42.5
19
32.5
A
Stroke + 95
19 22.5
A 64
Stroke + 169
40 30 Dog fitting for switch
17.5
2
33
5 Work piece mounting reference plane∗
30
10
21.5
60
15
Body mounting reference plane∗
89.5
Pitch = 100
Section AA
(n1-1) x pitch
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6ENF- 100- LTF6ENF- 200- LTF6ENF- 300- LTF6ENF- 400- LTF6ENF- 500- LTF6ENF- 600-
47.5
2 3 4 5 6 7
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
150
0.5
0.6
1.2
2.5
4.5
300
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.6
2.6
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
7
Standard Motor
Series LTF6
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
100
ø10mm /10mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF6E 1 NH
Stroke
R 2
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V/110V AC(50/60Hz) 200V/220V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
mm
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
Performance
100
200
500
600
2.2
2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.7
15 500 AC servomotor (100W) Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø10mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
LC1-1H2HH- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
L1 (mm)
100 a=1000 a=2000 a=3000 0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
LTF6 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Model Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Load movement direction
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
8
390 ±0.05
Encoder
Switch Controller
400
180
Motor Main parts
300
Standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6ENH Scale: 18% 4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8 (2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
50 30
89.5
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
(20.5)
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable fixing clip
82.5
40
40 42.5
19
32.5
A
Stroke + 95
19 22.5
A 64
Stroke + 169
40 30 Dog fitting for switch
17.5
2
33
5 Work piece mounting reference plane∗
30
10
21.5
60
15
Body mounting reference plane∗
89.5
Pitch = 100
Section AA
(n1-1) x pitch
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6ENH- 100- LTF6ENH- 200- LTF6ENH- 300- LTF6ENH- 400- LTF6ENH- 500- LTF6ENH- 600-
47.5
2 3 4 5 6 7
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
250
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.7
2.9
500
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.8
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
9
Standard Motor
Series LTF8
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
200
ø15mm /10mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF8F 1 PH
R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V/110V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
Performance
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
4.6
5.5
6.3
7.1
8.0
8.8
9.6
10.5
11.3
12.1
350
290
240
5 to 40 (with no condensation) 50
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
360 500 ±0.02
Motor
AC servomotor (200W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Main parts
440
Ground ball screw ø15mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller
Model
LC1-1H3HH- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
L1 (mm)
a=1000 a=2000 a=3000
100
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
10
200
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
LTF8 300
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Model Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF8
Dimensions/LTF8FPH Scale: 18% 104.5
80 4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
46
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Sensor cable fixing clip Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
21.5
56
97.5
60
21.5
A Stroke + 135
72
Stroke + 219 12
50
5
40
31.5
45
61.5
A
97
Dog fitting for switch
20.5
36 19
46
4.5
Work piece mounting reference plane∗
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
21.5
74
Body mounting reference plane∗
Model
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
LTF8FPH- 100- LTF8FPH- 200- LTF8FPH- 300- LTF8FPH- 400- LTF8FPH- 500- LTF8FPH- 600- LTF8FPH- 700- LTF8FPH- 800- LTF8FPH- 900- LTF8FPH-1000-
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
67.5
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
250
0.6
0.7
1.0
2.6
4.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
11
Standard Motor
Series LTF8
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
200
ø15mm /20mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF8F 1 PL
R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V/110V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
Performance
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
4.6
5.5
6.3
7.1
8.0
8.8
9.6
10.5
11.3
12.1
710
580
480
5 to 40 (with no condensation) 25
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
180 1000 ±0.02
Motor
AC servomotor (200W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Main parts
890
Ground ball screw ø15mm, 20mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller
Model
LC1-1H3HL- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
L1 (mm)
a=1000 a=2000 a=3000
100
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
12
200
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
LTF8 300
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Model Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF8
Dimensions/LTF8FPL Scale: 18% 104.5
80 4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
46
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Sensor cable fixing clip Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
21.5
56
97.5
60
21.5
A Stroke + 135
72
Stroke + 219 12
50
5
40
31.5
45
61.5
A
97
Dog fitting for switch
20.5
36 19
46
4.5
Work piece mounting reference plane∗
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
21.5
74
Body mounting reference plane∗
Model
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
LTF8FPL- 100- LTF8FPL- 200- LTF8FPL- 300- LTF8FPL- 400- LTF8FPL- 500- LTF8FPL- 600- LTF8FPL- 700- LTF8FPL- 800- LTF8FPL- 900- LTF8FPL-1000-
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
67.5
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
1000
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.4
1.9
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
13
Standard Motor
Series LTF8
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
200
ø15mm /10mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF8F 1 NH
R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V/110V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
Performance
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
4.6
5.5
6.3
7.1
8.0
8.8
9.6
10.5
11.3
12.1
350
290
240
5 to 40 (with no condensation) 50
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
360 500 ±0.05
Motor
AC servomotor (200W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Main parts
440
Rolled ball screw ø15mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller
Model
LC1-1H3HH- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
L1 (mm)
a=1000 a=2000 a=3000
100
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
14
200
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
LTF8 300
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Model Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF8
Dimensions/LTF8FNH Scale: 18% 104.5
80 4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
46
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Sensor cable fixing clip Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
21.5
56
97.5
60
21.5
A Stroke + 135
72
Stroke + 219 12
50
5
40
31.5
45
61.5
A
97
Dog fitting for switch
20.5
36 19
46
4.5
Work piece mounting reference plane∗
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
21.5
74
Body mounting reference plane∗
Model
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
LTF8FNH- 100- LTF8FNH- 200- LTF8FNH- 300- LTF8FNH- 400- LTF8FNH- 500- LTF8FNH- 600- LTF8FNH- 700- LTF8FNH- 800- LTF8FNH- 900- LTF8FNH-1000-
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
67.5
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
250
0.6
0.7
1.0
2.6
4.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
15
Standard Motor
Series LTF8
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
200
ø15mm /20mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF8F 1 NL
R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V/110V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
Performance
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
4.6
5.5
6.3
7.1
8.0
8.8
9.6
10.5
11.3
12.1
710
580
480
5 to 40 (with no condensation) 25
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
180 1000 ±0.05
Motor
AC servomotor (200W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Main parts
890
Rolled ball screw ø15mm, 20mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller
Model
LC1-1H3HL- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
L1 (mm)
a=1000 a=2000 a=3000
100
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
16
200
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
LTF8 300
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Model Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF8
Dimensions/LTF8FNL Scale: 18% 104.5
80 4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
46
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Sensor cable fixing clip Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
21.5
56
97.5
60
21.5
A Stroke + 135
72
Stroke + 219 12
50
5
40
31.5
45
61.5
A
97
Dog fitting for switch
20.5
36 19
46
4.5
Work piece mounting reference plane∗
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
21.5
74
Body mounting reference plane∗
Model
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
LTF8FNL- 100- LTF8FNL- 200- LTF8FNL- 300- LTF8FNL- 400- LTF8FNL- 500- LTF8FNL- 600- LTF8FNL- 700- LTF8FNL- 800- LTF8FNL- 900- LTF8FNL-1000-
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
67.5
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
1000
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.4
1.9
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
17
Standard Motor
Series LTF6
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
100
ø10mm /6mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF6E 1 PF
K R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
Performance
mm
100
200
500
600
kg
2.4
2.9 3.4 3.9 4.4 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.9
Operating temperature range °C Work load kg N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
300 300 AC servomotor (100W) with brake Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø10mm, 6mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection
With coupling
Model
Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller Model Regenerative Model absorption unit
LC1-1H2VF- (Refer to page 73 for details.) LC7R-K1A (Refer to page 86 for details.)
Note) Be sure to use a regenerative absorption unit with this product.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Model
LTF6
a Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
200
L1
100
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
Transfer load m (kg)
Mey
L3 (mm)
a
Vertical
Rolling
200
L3
100 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
18
230 ±0.02
Encoder
Switch
400
6
Rated thrust
Motor Main parts
300
6
Standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6EPF Scale: 18% 4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
89.5
50 30
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
(20.5)
40
Brake power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm Sensor cable fixing clip
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
82.5 40
32.5
42.5
A
Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
120.5
15
30
2
33 17.5 Body mounting reference plane∗
64
Dog fitting for switch
40 30
10 Work piece mounting 5 reference plane∗
19 22.5
19
A
60
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
21.5
47.5
Section AA
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6EPF- 100K- LTF6EPF- 200K- LTF6EPF- 300K- LTF6EPF- 400K- LTF6EPF- 500K- LTF6EPF- 600K-
2 3 4 5 6 7
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
150
0.5
0.6
1.2
2.5
4.5
300
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.6
2.6
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
19
Standard Motor
Series LTF6
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
100
ø10mm /10mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF6E 1 PH
K R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications
Performance
Standard stroke Body weight
mm
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
100
200
500
600
2.4
2.9 3.4 3.9 4.4 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.9
3 500 AC servomotor (100W) with brake Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø10mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection
With coupling
Model
Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller Model Regenerative Model absorption unit
LC1-1H2VH- (Refer to page 73 for details.) LC7R-K1A (Refer to page 86 for details.)
Note) Be sure to use a regenerative absorption unit with this product.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Model
LTF6
a Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
200
L1
100
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
Transfer load m (kg)
Mey
L3 (mm)
a
Vertical
Rolling
200
L3
100 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
20
390 ±0.02
Encoder
Switch
400
180
Motor Main parts
300
6
Standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6EPH Scale: 18% 4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
89.5
50 30
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
(20.5)
40
Brake power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm Sensor cable fixing clip
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
82.5 40
32.5
42.5
A
Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
120.5
15
30
2
33 17.5 Body mounting reference plane∗
64
Dog fitting for switch
40 30
10 Work piece mounting 5 reference plane∗
19 22.5
19
A
60
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
21.5
47.5
Section AA
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6EPH- 100K- LTF6EPH- 200K- LTF6EPH- 300K- LTF6EPH- 400K- LTF6EPH- 500K- LTF6EPH- 600K-
2 3 4 5 6 7
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
250
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.7
2.9
500
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.8
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
21
Standard Motor
Series LTF6
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
100
ø10mm /6mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF6E 1 NF
K R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications
Performance
Standard stroke Body weight
mm
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
100
200
500
600
2.4
2.9 3.4 3.9 4.4 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.9
6 300 AC servomotor (100W) with brake Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø10mm, 6mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection
With coupling
Model
Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller Model Regenerative Model absorption unit
LC1-1H2VF- (Refer to page 73 for details.) LC7R-K1A (Refer to page 86 for details.)
Note) Be sure to use a regenerative absorption unit with this product.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Model
LTF6
a Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
200
L1
100
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
Transfer load m (kg)
Mey
L3 (mm)
a
Vertical
Rolling
200
L3
100 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
22
230 ±0.05
Encoder
Switch
400
300
Motor Main parts
300
6
Standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6ENF Scale: 18% 4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
89.5
50 30
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
(20.5)
40
Brake power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm Sensor cable fixing clip
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
82.5 40
32.5
42.5
A
Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
120.5
15
30
2
33 17.5 Body mounting reference plane∗
64
Dog fitting for switch
40 30
10 Work piece mounting 5 reference plane∗
19 22.5
19
A
60
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
21.5
47.5
Section AA
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6ENF- 100K- LTF6ENF- 200K- LTF6ENF- 300K- LTF6ENF- 400K- LTF6ENF- 500K- LTF6ENF- 600K-
2 3 4 5 6 7
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
150
0.5
0.6
1.2
2.5
4.5
300
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.6
2.6
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
23
Standard Motor
Series LTF6
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
100
ø10mm /10mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF6E 1 NH
K R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications
Performance
Standard stroke Body weight
mm
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
100
200
500
600
2.4
2.9 3.4 3.9 4.4 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.9
3 500 AC servomotor (100W) with brake Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø10mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection
With coupling
Model
Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller Model Regenerative Model absorption unit
LC1-1H2VH- (Refer to page 73 for details.) LC7R-K1A (Refer to page 86 for details.)
Note) Be sure to use a regenerative absorption unit with this product.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Model
LTF6
a Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
200
L1
100
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
Transfer load m (kg)
Mey
L3 (mm)
a
Vertical
Rolling
200
L3
100 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
24
390 ±0.05
Encoder
Switch
400
180
Motor Main parts
300
6
Standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6ENH Scale: 18% 4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
89.5
50 30
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
(20.5)
40
Brake power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm Sensor cable fixing clip
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
82.5 40
32.5
42.5
A
Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
120.5
15
30
2
33 17.5 Body mounting reference plane∗
64
Dog fitting for switch
40 30
10 Work piece mounting 5 reference plane∗
19 22.5
19
A
60
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
21.5
47.5
Section AA
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6ENH- 100K- LTF6ENH- 200K- LTF6ENH- 300K- LTF6ENH- 400K- LTF6ENH- 500K- LTF6ENH- 600K-
2 3 4 5 6 7
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
250
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.7
2.9
500
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.8
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
25
Standard Motor
Series LTF8
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
200
ø15mm /10mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF8F 1 PH
K R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
Performance
mm
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
5.0
5.9
6.7
7.5
8.4
9.2
10.0
10.9
11.7
12.5
350
290
240
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
5 to 40 (with no condensation) 10
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
360 500 ±0.02
Motor
AC servomotor (200W) with brake
Encoder Main parts
440
Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø15mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller
Model
LC1-1H3VF- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Regenerative Model absorption unit
LC7R-K1A (Refer to page 86 for details.)
Note) Be sure to use a regenerative absorption unit with this product.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Model
LTF8
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
a
Vertical
Rolling
300 200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
26
Standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF8
Dimensions/LTF8FPH Scale: 18% 80
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
104.5
46
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Brake power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable fixing clip 56 21.5
60
97.5
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
45
61.5
A
72 126.5
Stroke + 219 12
31.5
21.5
A Stroke + 135 50
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗
Dog fitting for switch
46
36
4.5
20.5
40
19
Pitch = 100 Body mounting reference plane∗
(n1-1) x pitch
67.5
21.5
74
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
LTF8FPH- 100K- LTF8FPH- 200K- LTF8FPH- 300K- LTF8FPH- 400K- LTF8FPH- 500K- LTF8FPH- 600K- LTF8FPH- 700K- LTF8FPH- 800K- LTF8FPH- 900K- LTF8FPH-1000K-
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
250
0.6
0.7
1.0
2.6
4.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
27
Standard Motor
Series LTF8
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
200
ø15mm /20mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF8F 1 PL
K R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
Performance
mm
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
5.0
5.9
6.7
7.5
8.4
9.2
10.0
10.9
11.7
12.5
710
580
480
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
5 to 40 (with no condensation) 5
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
180 1000 ±0.02
Motor
AC servomotor (200W) with brake
Encoder Main parts
890
Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø15mm, 20mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller
Model
LC1-1H3VL- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Regenerative Model absorption unit
LC7R-K1A (Refer to page 86 for details.)
Note) Be sure to use a regenerative absorption unit with this product.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Model
LTF8
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
a
Vertical
Rolling
300 200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
28
Standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF8
Dimensions/LTF8FPL Scale: 18% 80
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
104.5
46
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Brake power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable fixing clip 56 21.5
60
97.5
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
45
61.5
A
72 126.5
Stroke + 219 12
31.5
21.5
A Stroke + 135 50
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗
Dog fitting for switch
46
36
4.5
20.5
40
19
Pitch = 100 Body mounting reference plane∗
(n1-1) x pitch
67.5
21.5
74
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
LTF8FPL- 100K- LTF8FPL- 200K- LTF8FPL- 300K- LTF8FPL- 400K- LTF8FPL- 500K- LTF8FPL- 600K- LTF8FPL- 700K- LTF8FPL- 800K- LTF8FPL- 900K- LTF8FPL-1000K-
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
1000
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.4
1.9
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
29
Standard Motor
Series LTF8
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
200
ø15mm /10mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF8F 1 NH
K R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
Performance
mm
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
5.0
5.9
6.7
7.5
8.4
9.2
10.0
10.9
11.7
12.5
350
290
240
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
5 to 40 (with no condensation) 10
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
360 500 ±0.05
Motor
AC servomotor (200W) with brake
Encoder Main parts
440
Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø15mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller
Model
LC1-1H3VH- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Regenerative Model absorption unit
LC7R-K1A (Refer to page 86 for details.)
Note) Be sure to use a regenerative absorption unit with this product.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Model
LTF8
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
a
Vertical
Rolling
300 200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
30
Standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF8
Dimensions/LTF8FNH Scale: 18% 80
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
104.5
46
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Brake power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable fixing clip 56 21.5
60
97.5
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
45
61.5
A
72 126.5
Stroke + 219 12
31.5
21.5
A Stroke + 135 50
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗
Dog fitting for switch
46
36
4.5
20.5
40
19
Pitch = 100 Body mounting reference plane∗
(n1-1) x pitch
67.5
21.5
74
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
LTF8FNH- 100K- LTF8FNH- 200K- LTF8FNH- 300K- LTF8FNH- 400K- LTF8FNH- 500K- LTF8FNH- 600K- LTF8FNH- 700K- LTF8FNH- 800K- LTF8FNH- 900K- LTF8FNH-1000K-
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
250
0.6
0.7
1.0
2.6
4.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
31
Standard Motor
Series LTF8
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
200
ø15mm /20mm lead
W
How to Order
LTF8F 1 NL
K R 2
Stroke
Motor/switch entry direction Left entry
Power supply voltage 1 2
Cable length
100V AC(50/60Hz) 200V AC(50/60Hz)
2 3 4 5
Motor/switch entry direction R L
Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
2m 3m 4m 5m Right entry
Specifications Standard stroke Body weight
Performance
mm
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
5.0
5.9
6.7
7.5
8.4
9.2
10.0
10.9
11.7
12.5
710
580
480
kg Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
5 to 40 (with no condensation) 5
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
180 1000 ±0.05
Motor
AC servomotor (200W) with brake
Encoder Main parts
890
Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø15mm, 20mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
Model
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Controller
Model
LC1-1H3VL- (Refer to page 73 for details.)
Regenerative Model absorption unit
LC7R-K1A (Refer to page 86 for details.)
Note) Be sure to use a regenerative absorption unit with this product.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment Mounting orientation Load movement direction
Model
LTF8
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
a
Vertical
Rolling
300 200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
32
Standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF8
Dimensions/LTF8FNL Scale: 18% 80
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
104.5
46
Encoder signal line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable
Motor power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Brake power line Cable length 70 to 130mm
Sensor cable fixing clip 56 21.5
60
97.5
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
45
61.5
A
72 126.5
Stroke + 219 12
31.5
21.5
A Stroke + 135 50
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗
Dog fitting for switch
46
36
4.5
20.5
40
19
Pitch = 100 Body mounting reference plane∗
(n1-1) x pitch
67.5
21.5
74
Model
∗ The body mounting reference plane and work piece mounting reference plane should be used as standards when mounting onto equipment. Refer to pages starting with 68 for mounting.
n1
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
LTF8FNL- 100K- LTF8FNL- 200K- LTF8FNL- 300K- LTF8FNL- 400K- LTF8FNL- 500K- LTF8FNL- 600K- LTF8FNL- 700K- LTF8FNL- 800K- LTF8FNL- 900K- LTF8FNL-1000K-
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.) Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
1000
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.4
1.9
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
33
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF6
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
100
ø10mm/6mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF6 G E 1 PF Motor specification
Power supply voltage
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
G R Y
X10
Stroke
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
Switch specifications Nil
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C
100
200
500
600
1.7
2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.1
400
kg
30
Rated thrust
N
300
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
300
230 ±0.02
AC servomotor (100W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø10mm, 6mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
300
Work load
Motor Main parts
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
L1 (mm)
200
a=1000 a=2000 a=3000 10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
34
100
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
m : a : Me: L :
LTF6
L3 (mm)
L1
Pitching
Mep m
Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction a
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
Transfer load m (kg)
30
Transfer load (kg) Work piece acceleration (mm/s2) Allowable dynamic moment Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Non-standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6EPF(X10) Scale: 20% Photo micro sensor
50 30
4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
D
Proximity sensor
E
5
2
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
14.8
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
12 (Groove depth 1)
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
82.5
∗3 D
PC
B/2 in case of 500 to 600 mm strokes
B: Stroke + 75 Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
19 22.5
19
A
42.5
A
10
1 4 5
64 Motor unit∗2
10
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
40 30
5.8 3.3
17.5
33
30
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗1
1 4 4.9
11.5
40
4-C∗3
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread to 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
32.5
21.5
8 5.8 3.3
(20.5)
40
5
Body mounting reference plane∗1
15
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
47.5
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions)
60
Section AA Model
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6EPF- 100--X10 LTF6EPF- 200--X10 LTF6EPF- 300--X10 LTF6EPF- 400--X10 LTF6EPF- 500--X10 LTF6EPF- 600--X10
n1
n2
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 2
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 69 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
150
0.5
0.6
1.2
2.5
4.5
300
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.6
2.6
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2 ∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
100
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
100
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
100
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM011P1A
MSD011P1E
200/230
MSM012P1A
MSD013P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ13
MR-C10A1 MR-C10A
100/115
SGME-01BF12
SGDE-01BP
200/230
SGME-01AF12
SGDE-01AP
Motor dimension (mm) 103 86.5 94.5
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
35
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF6
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
100
ø10mm/10mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF6 G E 1 PH Motor specification
Power supply voltage
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
G R Y
X10
Stroke
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
Switch specifications Nil
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C Work load
kg
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
100
200
500
600
1.7
2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.1
400
180 500
390 ±0.02
AC servomotor (100W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø10mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
300
15
Motor Main parts
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
L1 (mm)
200
a=1000 a=2000 a=3000 10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
36
100
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
m : a : Me: L :
LTF6
L3 (mm)
L1
Pitching
Mep m
Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction a
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
Transfer load m (kg)
30
Transfer load (kg) Work piece acceleration (mm/s2) Allowable dynamic moment Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Non-standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6EPH(X10) Scale: 20% Photo micro sensor
50 30
4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
D
Proximity sensor
E
5
2
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
14.8
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
12 (Groove depth 1)
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
82.5
∗3 D
PC
B/2 in case of 500 to 600 mm strokes
B: Stroke + 75 Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
19 22.5
19
A
42.5
A
10
1 4 5
64 Motor unit∗2
10
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
40 30
5.8 3.3
17.5
33
30
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗1
1 4 4.9
11.5
40
4-C∗3
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread to 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
32.5
21.5
8 5.8 3.3
(20.5)
40
5
Body mounting reference plane∗1
15
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
47.5
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions)
60
Section AA Model
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6EPH- 100--X10 LTF6EPH- 200--X10 LTF6EPH- 300--X10 LTF6EPH- 400--X10 LTF6EPH- 500--X10 LTF6EPH- 600--X10
n1
n2
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 2
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 69 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
250
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.7
2.9
500
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.8
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2 ∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
100
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
100
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
100
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM011P1A
MSD011P1E
200/230
MSM012P1A
MSD013P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ13
MR-C10A1 MR-C10A
100/115
SGME-01BF12
SGDE-01BP
200/230
SGME-01AF12
SGDE-01AP
Motor dimension (mm) 103 86.5 94.5
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
37
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF6
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
100
ø10mm/6mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF6 G E 1 NF Motor specification
Power supply voltage
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
G R Y
X10
Stroke
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
Switch specifications Nil
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C Work load
kg
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
100
200
500
600
1.7
2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.1
400
300 300
230 ±0.05
AC servomotor (100W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø10mm, 6mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
300
30
Motor Main parts
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
L1 (mm)
200
a=1000 a=2000 a=3000 10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
38
100
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
m : a : Me: L :
LTF6
L3 (mm)
L1
Pitching
Mep m
Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction a
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
Transfer load m (kg)
30
Transfer load (kg) Work piece acceleration (mm/s2) Allowable dynamic moment Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Non-standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6ENF(X10) Scale: 20% Photo micro sensor
50 30
4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
D
Proximity sensor
E
5
2
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
14.8
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
12 (Groove depth 1)
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
82.5
∗3 D
PC
B/2 in case of 500 to 600 mm strokes
B: Stroke + 75 Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
19 22.5
19
A
42.5
A
10
1 4 5
64 Motor unit∗2
10
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
40 30
5.8 3.3
17.5
33
30
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗1
1 4 4.9
11.5
40
4-C∗3
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread to 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
32.5
21.5
8 5.8 3.3
(20.5)
40
5
Body mounting reference plane∗1
15
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
47.5
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions)
60
Section AA Model
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6ENF- 100--X10 LTF6ENF- 200--X10 LTF6ENF- 300--X10 LTF6ENF- 400--X10 LTF6ENF- 500--X10 LTF6ENF- 600--X10
n1
n2
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 2
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 69 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
150
0.5
0.6
1.2
2.5
4.5
300
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.6
2.6
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2 ∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
100
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
100
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
100
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM011P1A
MSD011P1E
200/230
MSM012P1A
MSD013P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ13
MR-C10A1 MR-C10A
100/115
SGME-01BF12
SGDE-01BP
200/230
SGME-01AF12
SGDE-01AP
Motor dimension (mm) 103 86.5 94.5
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
39
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF6
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
100
ø10mm/10mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF6 G E 1 NH Motor specification
Power supply voltage
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
G R Y
X10
Stroke
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
Switch specifications Nil
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C Work load
kg
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
100
200
500
600
1.7
2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.1
400
180 500
390 ±0.05
AC servomotor (100W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø10mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
300
15
Motor Main parts
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
L1 (mm)
200
a=1000 a=2000 a=3000 10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
Transfer load m (kg) 200
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
40
100
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
m : a : Me: L :
LTF6
L3 (mm)
L1
Pitching
Mep m
Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction a
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
Transfer load m (kg)
30
Transfer load (kg) Work piece acceleration (mm/s2) Allowable dynamic moment Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Non-standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6ENH(X10) Scale: 20% Photo micro sensor
50 30
4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
D
Proximity sensor
E
5
2
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
14.8
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
12 (Groove depth 1)
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
82.5
∗3 D
PC
B/2 in case of 500 to 600 mm strokes
B: Stroke + 75 Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
19 22.5
19
A
42.5
A
10
1 4 5
64 Motor unit∗2
10
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
40 30
5.8 3.3
15
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
17.5
33
30
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗1
1 4 4.9
11.5
40
4-C∗3
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread to 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
32.5
21.5
8 5.8 3.3
(20.5)
40
5
Body mounting reference plane∗1
47.5
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions)
60
Section AA Model
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6ENH- 100--X10 LTF6ENH- 200--X10 LTF6ENH- 300--X10 LTF6ENH- 400--X10 LTF6ENH- 500--X10 LTF6ENH- 600--X10
n1
n2
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 2
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 69 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
250
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.7
2.9
500
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.8
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2 ∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
100
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
100
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
100
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM011P1A
MSD011P1E
200/230
MSM012P1A
MSD013P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ13
MR-C10A1 MR-C10A
100/115
SGME-01BF12
SGDE-01BP
200/230
SGME-01AF12
SGDE-01AP
Motor dimension (mm) 103 86.5 94.5
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
41
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF8
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
200
ø15mm/10mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF8 G F 1 PH R Y
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
3.4
4.3
5.1
6.0
6.8
7.7
8.5
9.4
10.2
11.1
350
290
240
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
Work load
kg
50
Rated thrust
N
360
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
500
AC servomotor (200W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø15mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Switch
440 ±0.02
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
X10
Stroke
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
L1 (mm)
300 a=1000 a=2000 a=3000
100
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
42
200
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
m : a : Me: L :
LTF8
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
Transfer load m (kg)
50
Transfer load (kg) Work piece acceleration (mm/s2) Allowable dynamic moment Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Series LTF8
Non-standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Dimensions/LTF8FPH(X10) Scale: 13%
5 12 (Groove depth 1)
4-C∗3
60
E
∗3 D
PC
61.5
A
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
12 5
15
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
72
Stroke + 135 Stroke + 219
50 40
5.8 3.3
Body mounting reference plane∗1
19
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
Model
100--X10 200--X10 300--X10 400--X10 500--X10
74
20.5
36
46
Motor unit∗2
Work piece mounting reference plane∗1
Section AA
67.5
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500
1 4 4.9
B: Stroke + 105
LTF8FPHLTF8FPHLTF8FPHLTF8FPHLTF8FPH-
1 4 5
21.5 31.5
B/2 in case of 500 to 1000 mm strokes
21.5
14.8
A
14
21.5
97.5
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
56
D
8 5.8 3.3
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
Photo micro sensor
Proximity sensor 7.5
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
45
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 70 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
80 46
4.5
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
n1
n2
Model
2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1 1 2
LTF8FPH- 600--X10 LTF8FPH- 700--X10 LTF8FPH- 800--X10 LTF8FPH- 900--X10 LTF8FPH-1000--X10
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions) Stroke 600 700 800 900 1000
n1
n2
7 8 9 10 11
2 2 2 2 2
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
250
0.6
0.7
1.0
2.6
4.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
A
B
C
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2 ∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
D
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
200
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
200
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
200
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM021P1A
MSD021P1E
200/230
MSM022P1A
MSD023P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ23
MR-C20A1 MR-C20A
100/115
SGME-02BF12
SGDE-02BP
200/230
SGME-02AF12
SGDE-02AP
Motor dimension (mm) 95 89 96.5
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
43
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF8
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
200
ø15mm/20mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF8 G F 1 PL R Y
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
3.4
4.3
5.1
6.0
6.8
7.7
8.5
9.4
10.2
11.1
710
580
480
Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
5 to 40 (with no condensation) 25
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
180 1000
AC servomotor (200W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø15mm, 20mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Switch
890 ±0.02
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
X10
Stroke
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
L1 (mm)
300 a=1000 a=2000 a=3000
100
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
44
200
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
m : a : Me: L :
LTF8
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
Transfer load m (kg)
50
Transfer load (kg) Work piece acceleration (mm/s2) Allowable dynamic moment Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Series LTF8
Non-standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Dimensions/LTF8FPL(X10) Scale: 13%
5 12 (Groove depth 1)
4-C∗3
60
E
∗3 D
PC
61.5
A
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
12 5
15
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
72
Stroke + 135 Stroke + 219
50 40
5.8 3.3
Body mounting reference plane∗1
19
Pitch = 100
Model
LTF8FPLLTF8FPLLTF8FPLLTF8FPLLTF8FPL-
100--X10 200--X10 300--X10 400--X10 500--X10
74
20.5
36
46
Motor unit∗2
Work piece mounting reference plane∗1
Section AA
67.5
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500
1 4 4.9
B: Stroke + 105
(n1-1) x pitch
1 4 5
21.5 31.5
B/2 in case of 500 to 1000 mm strokes
21.5
14.8
A
14
21.5
97.5
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
56
D
8 5.8 3.3
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
Photo micro sensor
Proximity sensor 7.5
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
45
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 70 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
80 46
4.5
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
n1
n2
Model
2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1 1 2
LTF8FPL- 600--X10 LTF8FPL- 700--X10 LTF8FPL- 800--X10 LTF8FPL- 900--X10 LTF8FPL-1000--X10
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions) Stroke 600 700 800 900 1000
n1
n2
7 8 9 10 11
2 2 2 2 2
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
1000
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.4
1.9
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
A
B
C
∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
D
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
200
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
200
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
200
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM021P1A
MSD021P1E
200/230
MSM022P1A
MSD023P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ23
MR-C20A1 MR-C20A
100/115
SGME-02BF12
SGDE-02BP
200/230
SGME-02AF12
SGDE-02AP
Motor dimension (mm) 95 89 96.5
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
45
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF8
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
200
ø15mm/10mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF8 G F 1 NH R Y
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
3.4
4.3
5.1
6.0
6.8
7.7
8.5
9.4
10.2
11.1
350
290
240
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
Work load
kg
50
Rated thrust
N
360
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
500
AC servomotor (200W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø15mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Switch
440 ±0.05
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
X10
Stroke
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
L1 (mm)
300 a=1000 a=2000 a=3000
100
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
46
200
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
m : a : Me: L :
LTF8
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
Transfer load m (kg)
50
Transfer load (kg) Work piece acceleration (mm/s2) Allowable dynamic moment Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Series LTF8
Non-standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Dimensions/LTF8FNH(X10) Scale: 13%
5 12 (Groove depth 1)
4-C∗3
60
E
∗3 D
PC
61.5
A
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
12 5
15
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
72
Stroke + 135 Stroke + 219
50 40
5.8 3.3
Body mounting reference plane∗1
19
Pitch = 100
Model
LTF8FNHLTF8FNHLTF8FNHLTF8FNHLTF8FNH-
100--X10 200--X10 300--X10 400--X10 500--X10
74
20.5
36
46
Motor unit∗2
Work piece mounting reference plane∗1
Section AA
67.5
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500
1 4 4.9
B: Stroke + 105
(n1-1) x pitch
1 4 5
21.5 31.5
B/2 in case of 500 to 1000 mm strokes
21.5
14.8
A
14
21.5
97.5
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
56
D
8 5.8 3.3
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
Photo micro sensor
Proximity sensor 7.5
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
45
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 70 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
80 46
4.5
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
n1
n2
Model
2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1 1 2
LTF8FNH- 600--X10 LTF8FNH- 700--X10 LTF8FNH- 800--X10 LTF8FNH- 900--X10 LTF8FNH-1000--X10
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions) Stroke 600 700 800 900 1000
n1
n2
7 8 9 10 11
2 2 2 2 2
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
250
0.6
0.7
1.0
2.6
4.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
A
B
C
∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
D
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
200
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
200
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
200
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM021P1A
MSD021P1E
200/230
MSM022P1A
MSD023P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ23
MR-C20A1 MR-C20A
100/115
SGME-02BF12
SGDE-02BP
200/230
SGME-02AF12
SGDE-02AP
Motor dimension (mm) 95 89 96.5
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
47
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF8
Horizontal Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
200
ø15mm/20mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF8 G F 1 NL R Y
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
3.4
4.3
5.1
6.0
6.8
7.7
8.5
9.4
10.2
11.1
710
580
480
Operating temperature range °C Work load kg
5 to 40 (with no condensation) 25
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
180 1000
AC servomotor (200W)
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø15mm, 20mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Switch
890 ±0.05
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
X10
Stroke
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Allowable Moment (N⋅m) Allowable dynamic moment
Mer m L2 Mer
L3
Yawing
m
m Mey a
L1 (mm)
300 a=1000 a=2000 a=3000
100
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
Transfer load m (kg) 300
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
48
200
0
L2 (mm)
Rolling
L2
m : a : Me: L :
LTF8
L3 (mm)
Mep m
L1
Pitching
a
Horizontal/Lateral Lateral Horizontal Horizontal/Lateral
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
10
20
30
40
Transfer load m (kg)
50
Transfer load (kg) Work piece acceleration (mm/s2) Allowable dynamic moment Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Series LTF8
Non-standard Motor/Horizontal Mount Specification
Dimensions/LTF8FNL(X10) Scale: 13%
5 12 (Groove depth 1)
4-C∗3
60
E
∗3 D
PC
61.5
A
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
12 5
15
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
72
Stroke + 135 Stroke + 219
50 40
5.8 3.3
Body mounting reference plane∗1
19
Pitch = 100
Model
LTF8FNLLTF8FNLLTF8FNLLTF8FNLLTF8FNL-
100--X10 200--X10 300--X10 400--X10 500--X10
74
20.5
36
46
Motor unit∗2
Work piece mounting reference plane∗1
Section AA
67.5
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500
1 4 4.9
B: Stroke + 105
(n1-1) x pitch
1 4 5
21.5 31.5
B/2 in case of 500 to 1000 mm strokes
21.5
14.8
A
14
21.5
97.5
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
56
D
8 5.8 3.3
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
Photo micro sensor
Proximity sensor 7.5
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
45
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 70 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
80 46
4.5
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
n1
n2
Model
2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1 1 2
LTF8FNL- 600--X10 LTF8FNL- 700--X10 LTF8FNL- 800--X10 LTF8FNL- 900--X10 LTF8FNL-1000--X10
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions) Stroke 600 700 800 900 1000
n1
n2
7 8 9 10 11
2 2 2 2 2
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
1000
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.4
1.9
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
A
B
C
∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
D
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
200
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
200
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
200
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM021P1A
MSD021P1E
200/230
MSM022P1A
MSD023P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ23
MR-C20A1 MR-C20A
100/115
SGME-02BF12
SGDE-02BP
200/230
SGME-02AF12
SGDE-02AP
Motor dimension (mm) 95 89 96.5
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
49
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF6
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
100
ø10mm/6mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF6 G E 1 PF R Y
K
X10
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C Work load
kg
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
100
200
500
600
1.7
2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.1
400
300 300
230 ±0.02
AC servomotor (100W) with brake
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø10mm, 6mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
300
6
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
Stroke
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Regenerative absorption unit
Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Refer to the selection guide below.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m)
Regenerative Absorption Unit Selection Guide
Allowable dynamic moment
Depending on operating conditions, a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor may be required for a non-standard motor with vertical mount specification. How to determine regenerative energy is shown below.
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
LTF6
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
200
100
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
(A) and (B) vary depending on each motor and driver. Use of a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor is recommended under any conditions when a vertical specification is used. Contact SMC for questions regarding selections.
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
Vertical
Yawing
200
a
100 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
50
Regenerative energy = Motor coil energy consumption + Driver capacitor energy consumption (A) + Regenerative resistor energy consumption (B)
Non-standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6EPF(X10) Scale: 20% 50 30
4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
Photo micro sensor
D
Proximity sensor
E
5
2
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
14.8
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
12 (Groove depth 1)
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
82.5
∗3 D
PC
B/2 in case of 500 to 600 mm strokes
B: Stroke + 75 Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
19 22.5
19
A
42.5
A
10
1 4 5
64 Motor unit∗2
10
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
40 30
5.8 3.3
17.5
33
30
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗1
1 4 4.9
11.5
40
4-C∗3
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
32.5
21.5
8 5.8 3.3
(20.5)
40
5
Body mounting reference plane∗1
15
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
47.5
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions)
60
Section AA Model
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6EPF- 100K--X10 LTF6EPF- 200K--X10 LTF6EPF- 300K--X10 LTF6EPF- 400K--X10 LTF6EPF- 500K--X10 LTF6EPF- 600K--X10
n1
n2
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 2
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 69 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
150
0.5
0.6
1.2
2.5
4.5
300
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.6
2.6
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2 ∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
100
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
100
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
100
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM011P1B
MSD011P1E
200/230
MSM012P1B
MSD013P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ13B
MR-C10A1 MR-C10A
100/115
SGME-01BF12B
SGDE-01BP
200/230
SGME-01AF12B
SGDE-01AP
Motor dimension (mm) 135 114.5 135
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
51
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF6
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
100
ø10mm/10mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF6 G E 1 PH R Y
K
X10
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C Work load
kg
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
100
200
500
600
1.7
2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.1
400
180 500
390 ±0.02
AC servomotor (100W) with brake
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø10mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
300
3
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
Stroke
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Regenerative absorption unit
Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Refer to the selection guide below.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m)
Regenerative Absorption Unit Selection Guide
Allowable dynamic moment
Depending on operating conditions, a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor may be required for a non-standard motor with vertical mount specification. How to determine regenerative energy is shown below.
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
LTF6
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
200
100
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
(A) and (B) vary depending on each motor and driver. Use of a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor is recommended under any conditions when a vertical specification is used. Contact SMC for questions regarding selections.
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
Vertical
Yawing
200
a
100 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
52
Regenerative energy = Motor coil energy consumption + Driver capacitor energy consumption (A) + Regenerative resistor energy consumption (B)
Non-standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6EPH(X10) Scale: 20% 50 30
4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
Photo micro sensor
D
Proximity sensor
E
5
2
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
14.8
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
12 (Groove depth 1)
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
82.5
∗3 D
PC
B/2 in case of 500 to 600 mm strokes
B: Stroke + 75 Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
19 22.5
19
A
42.5
A
10
1 4 5
64 Motor unit∗2
10
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
40 30
5.8 3.3
17.5
33
30
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗1
1 4 4.9
11.5
40
4-C∗3
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
32.5
21.5
8 5.8 3.3
(20.5)
40
5
Body mounting reference plane∗1
15
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
47.5
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions)
60
Section AA Model
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6EPH- 100K--X10 LTF6EPH- 200K--X10 LTF6EPH- 300K--X10 LTF6EPH- 400K--X10 LTF6EPH- 500K--X10 LTF6EPH- 600K--X10
n1
n2
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 2
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 69 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
250
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.7
2.9
500
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.8
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2 ∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
100
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
100
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
100
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM011P1B
MSD011P1E
200/230
MSM012P1B
MSD013P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ13B
MR-C10A1 MR-C10A
100/115
SGME-01BF12B
SGDE-01BP
200/230
SGME-01AF12B
SGDE-01AP
Motor dimension (mm) 135 114.5 135
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
53
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF6
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
100
ø10mm/6mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF6 G E 1 NF Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
R Y
K
X10
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C Work load
kg
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
100
200
500
600
1.7
2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.1
400
300 300
230 ±0.05
AC servomotor (100W) with brake
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø10mm, 6mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
300
6
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
Stroke
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Regenerative absorption unit
Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Refer to the selection guide below.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m)
Regenerative Absorption Unit Selection Guide
Allowable dynamic moment
Depending on operating conditions, a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor may be required for a non-standard motor with vertical mount specification. How to determine regenerative energy is shown below.
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
LTF6
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
200
100
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
(A) and (B) vary depending on each motor and driver. Use of a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor is recommended under any conditions when a vertical specification is used. Contact SMC for questions regarding selections.
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
Vertical
Yawing
200
a
100 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
54
Regenerative energy = Motor coil energy consumption + Driver capacitor energy consumption (A) + Regenerative resistor energy consumption (B)
Non-standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6ENF(X10) Scale: 20% 50 30
4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
Photo micro sensor
D
Proximity sensor
E
5
2
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
14.8
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
12 (Groove depth 1)
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
82.5
∗3 D
PC
B/2 in case of 500 to 600 mm strokes
B: Stroke + 75 Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
19 22.5
19
A
42.5
A
10
1 4 5
64 Motor unit∗2
10
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
40 30
5.8 3.3
17.5
33
30
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗1
1 4 4.9
11.5
40
4-C∗3
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
32.5
21.5
8 5.8 3.3
(20.5)
40
5
Body mounting reference plane∗1
15
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
47.5
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions)
60
Section AA Model
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6ENF- 100K--X10 LTF6ENF- 200K--X10 LTF6ENF- 300K--X10 LTF6ENF- 400K--X10 LTF6ENF- 500K--X10 LTF6ENF- 600K--X10
n1
n2
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 2
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 69 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
150
0.5
0.6
1.2
2.5
4.5
300
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.6
2.6
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2 ∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
100
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
100
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
100
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM011P1B
MSD011P1E
200/230
MSM012P1B
MSD013P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ13B
MR-C10A1 MR-C10A
100/115
SGME-01BF12B
SGDE-01BP
200/230
SGME-01AF12B
SGDE-01AP
Motor dimension (mm) 135 114.5 135
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
55
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF6
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
100
ø10mm/10mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF6 G E 1 NH Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
R Y
K
X10
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C Work load
kg
Rated thrust
N
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
100
200
500
600
1.7
2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 5 to 40 (with no condensation)
4.1
400
180 500
390 ±0.05
AC servomotor (100W) with brake
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø10mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
300
3
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
Stroke
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Regenerative absorption unit
Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Refer to the selection guide below.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m)
Regenerative Absorption Unit Selection Guide
Allowable dynamic moment
Depending on operating conditions, a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor may be required for a non-standard motor with vertical mount specification. How to determine regenerative energy is shown below.
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
LTF6
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
200
100
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
(A) and (B) vary depending on each motor and driver. Use of a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor is recommended under any conditions when a vertical specification is used. Contact SMC for questions regarding selections.
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
Vertical
Yawing
200
a
100 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000 0
2
4
6
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
56
Regenerative energy = Motor coil energy consumption + Driver capacitor energy consumption (A) + Regenerative resistor energy consumption (B)
Non-standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Series LTF6
Dimensions/LTF6ENH(X10) Scale: 20% 50 30
4-M5 x 0.8 thread depth 8
Photo micro sensor
D
Proximity sensor
E
5
2
(2 x n1)-ø5.5, Drill through ø11.5, counter bore depth 5
14.8
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
12 (Groove depth 1)
Stroke + 66 (Table movement range)
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
82.5
∗3 D
PC
B/2 in case of 500 to 600 mm strokes
B: Stroke + 75 Stroke + 95 Stroke + 169
19 22.5
19
A
42.5
A
10
1 4 5
64 Motor unit∗2
10
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
40 30
5.8 3.3
17.5
33
30
Work piece 5 mounting reference plane∗1
1 4 4.9
11.5
40
4-C∗3
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
32.5
21.5
8 5.8 3.3
(20.5)
40
5
Body mounting reference plane∗1
15
Pitch = 100 (n1-1) x pitch
47.5
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions)
60
Section AA Model
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500 600
LTF6ENH- 100K--X10 LTF6ENH- 200K--X10 LTF6ENH- 300K--X10 LTF6ENH- 400K--X10 LTF6ENH- 500K--X10 LTF6ENH- 600K--X10
n1
n2
2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 2
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 69 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
300
600
10
0.5
1.5
10.5
30.5
60.5
100
0.5
0.6
1.5
3.5
6.5
250
0.5
0.6
0.9
1.7
2.9
500
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.8
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.4 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2 ∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
A
B
C
D
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
100
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
100
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
100
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM011P1B
MSD011P1E
200/230
MSM012P1B
MSD013P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ13B
MR-C10A1 MR-C10A
100/115
SGME-01BF12B
SGDE-01BP
200/230
SGME-01AF12B
SGDE-01AP
Motor dimension (mm) 135 114.5 135
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
57
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF8
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
200
ø15mm/10mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF8 G F 1 PH R Y
K
X10
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
3.4
4.3
5.1
6.0
6.8
7.7
8.5
9.4
10.2
11.1
350
290
240
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
Work load
kg
10
Rated thrust
N
360
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
500
AC servomotor (200W) with brake
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø15mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
440 ±0.02
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
Stroke
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Regenerative absorption unit
Refer to the selection guide below.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m)
Regenerative Absorption Unit Selection Guide
Allowable dynamic moment
Depending on operating conditions, a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor may be required for a non-standard motor with vertical mount specification. How to determine regenerative energy is shown below.
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
LTF8
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
2
0
4
6
8
10
(A) and (B) vary depending on each motor and driver. Use of a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor is recommended under any conditions when a vertical specification is used. Contact SMC for questions regarding selections.
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
Vertical
Yawing
300
a
200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
58
Regenerative energy = Motor coil energy consumption + Driver capacitor energy consumption (A) + Regenerative resistor energy consumption (B)
Series LTF8
Non-standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Dimensions/LTF8FPH(X10) Scale: 13%
4-C∗3
60
∗3 D C P
E
61.5
A
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
12 5
15
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
72
Stroke + 135 Stroke + 219
50 40
5.8 3.3
Body mounting reference plane∗1
19
Pitch = 100
Model
LTF8FPHLTF8FPHLTF8FPHLTF8FPHLTF8FPH-
100K--X10 200K--X10 300K--X10 400K--X10 500K--X10
74
20.5
36
46
Motor unit∗2
Work piece mounting reference plane∗1
Section AA
67.5
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500
1 4 4.9
B: Stroke + 105
(n1-1) x pitch
1 4 5
21.5 31.5
B/2 in case of 500 to 1000 mm strokes
21.5
14.8
A
14
21.5
97.5
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
56
D
7.5
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
Photo micro sensor
Proximity sensor
8 5.8 3.3
5 12 (Groove depth 1)
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
45
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 70 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
80 46
4.5
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
n1
n2
Model
2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1 1 2
LTF8FPH- 600K--X10 LTF8FPH- 700K--X10 LTF8FPH- 800K--X10 LTF8FPH- 900K--X10 LTF8FPH-1000K--X10
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions) Stroke 600 700 800 900 1000
n1
n2
7 8 9 10 11
2 2 2 2 2
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
250
0.6
0.7
1.0
2.6
4.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
A
B
C
∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
D
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
200
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
200
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
200
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM021P1B
MSD021P1E
200/230
MSM022P1B
MSD023P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ23B
MR-C20A1 MR-C20A
100/115
SGME-02BF12B
SGDE-02BP
200/230
SGME-02AF12B
SGDE-02AP
Motor dimension (mm) 128 121 136
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
59
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF8
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Ground Ball Screw
200
ø15mm/20mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF8 G F 1 PL R Y
K
X10
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
3.4
4.3
5.1
6.0
6.8
7.7
8.5
9.4
10.2
11.1
710
580
480
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
Work load
kg
5
Rated thrust
N
180
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
1000
AC servomotor (200W) with brake
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Ground ball screw ø15mm, 20mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
890 ±0.02
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
Stroke
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Regenerative absorption unit
Refer to the selection guide below.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m)
Regenerative Absorption Unit Selection Guide
Allowable dynamic moment
Depending on operating conditions, a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor may be required for a non-standard motor with vertical mount specification. How to determine regenerative energy is shown below.
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
LTF8
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
2
0
4
6
8
10
(A) and (B) vary depending on each motor and driver. Use of a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor is recommended under any conditions when a vertical specification is used. Contact SMC for questions regarding selections.
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
Vertical
Yawing
300
a
200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
60
Regenerative energy = Motor coil energy consumption + Driver capacitor energy consumption (A) + Regenerative resistor energy consumption (B)
Series LTF8
Non-standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Dimensions/LTF8FPL(X10) Scale: 13%
4-C∗3
60
∗3 D C P
E
61.5
A
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
12 5
15
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
72
Stroke + 135 Stroke + 219
50 40
5.8 3.3
Body mounting reference plane∗1
19
Pitch = 100
Model
LTF8FPLLTF8FPLLTF8FPLLTF8FPLLTF8FPL-
100K--X10 200K--X10 300K--X10 400K--X10 500K--X10
74
20.5
36
46
Motor unit∗2
Work piece mounting reference plane∗1
Section AA
67.5
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500
1 4 4.9
B: Stroke + 105
(n1-1) x pitch
1 4 5
21.5 31.5
B/2 in case of 500 to 1000 mm strokes
21.5
14.8
A
14
21.5
97.5
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
56
D
7.5
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
Photo micro sensor
Proximity sensor
8 5.8 3.3
5 12 (Groove depth 1)
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
45
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 70 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
80 46
4.5
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
n1
n2
Model
2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1 1 2
LTF8FPL- 600K--X10 LTF8FPL- 700K--X10 LTF8FPL- 800K--X10 LTF8FPL- 900K--X10 LTF8FPL-1000K--X10
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions) Stroke 600 700 800 900 1000
n1
n2
7 8 9 10 11
2 2 2 2 2
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
1000
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.4
1.9
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
A
B
C
∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
D
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
200
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
200
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
200
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM021P1B
MSD021P1E
200/230
MSM022P1B
MSD023P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ23B
MR-C20A1 MR-C20A
100/115
SGME-02BF12B
SGDE-02BP
200/230
SGME-02AF12B
SGDE-02AP
Motor dimension (mm) 128 121 136
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
61
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF8
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
200
ø15mm/10mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF8 G F 1 NH R Y
K
X10
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
3.4
4.3
5.1
6.0
6.8
7.7
8.5
9.4
10.2
11.1
350
290
240
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
Work load
kg
10
Rated thrust
N
360
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
500
AC servomotor (200W) with brake
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø15mm, 10mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
440 ±0.05
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
Stroke
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Regenerative absorption unit
Refer to the selection guide below.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m)
Regenerative Absorption Unit Selection Guide
Allowable dynamic moment
Depending on operating conditions, a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor may be required for a non-standard motor with vertical mount specification. How to determine regenerative energy is shown below.
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
LTF8
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
(A) and (B) vary depending on each motor and driver. Use of a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor is recommended under any conditions when a vertical specification is used. Contact SMC for questions regarding selections.
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
Vertical
Yawing
300
a
200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
62
Regenerative energy = Motor coil energy consumption + Driver capacitor energy consumption (A) + Regenerative resistor energy consumption (B)
Series LTF8
Non-standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Dimensions/LTF8FNH(X10) Scale: 13%
4-C∗3
60
∗3 D C P
E
61.5
A
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
12 5
15
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
72
Stroke + 135 Stroke + 219
50 40
5.8 3.3
Body mounting reference plane∗1
19
Pitch = 100
Model
LTF8FNHLTF8FNHLTF8FNHLTF8FNHLTF8FNH-
100K--X10 200K--X10 300K--X10 400K--X10 500K--X10
74
20.5
36
46
Motor unit∗2
Work piece mounting reference plane∗1
Section AA
67.5
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500
1 4 4.9
B: Stroke + 105
(n1-1) x pitch
1 4 5
21.5 31.5
B/2 in case of 500 to 1000 mm strokes
21.5
14.8
A
14
21.5
97.5
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
56
D
7.5
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
Photo micro sensor
Proximity sensor
8 5.8 3.3
5 12 (Groove depth 1)
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
45
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 70 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
80 46
4.5
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
n1
n2
Model
2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1 1 2
LTF8FNH- 600K--X10 LTF8FNH- 700K--X10 LTF8FNH- 800K--X10 LTF8FNH- 900K--X10 LTF8FNH-1000K--X10
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions) Stroke 600 700 800 900 1000
n1
n2
7 8 9 10 11
2 2 2 2 2
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
250
0.6
0.7
1.0
2.6
4.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
A
B
C
∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
D
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
200
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
200
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
200
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM021P1B
MSD021P1E
200/230
MSM022P1B
MSD023P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ23B
MR-C20A1 MR-C20A
100/115
SGME-02BF12B
SGDE-02BP
200/230
SGME-02AF12B
SGDE-02AP
Motor dimension (mm) 128 121 136
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
63
Non-standard Motor
Series LTF8
Vertical Mount
Motor Output
Rolled Ball Screw
200
ø15mm/20mm lead
W
How to Order Motor/switch entry direction
LTF8 G F 1 NL R Y
K
X10
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Yasukawa Electric Corporation
1
100/115V AC (50/60Hz)
Switch specifications
2
200/230V AC (50/60Hz)
0
Without motor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B
Nil
Motor/switch entry direction Nil R L
Without motor, switch and switch rail Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the right Motor straight, motor cable, switch and switch rail located on the left
mm Standard stroke Body weight (without motor) kg Operating temperature range °C
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
3.4
4.3
5.1
6.0
6.8
7.7
8.5
9.4
10.2
11.1
710
580
480
5 to 40 (with no condensation)
Work load
kg
5
Rated thrust
N
180
Maximum speed
mm/s
Positioning repeatability
mm
1000
AC servomotor (200W) with brake
Encoder
Incremental system
Lead screw
Rolled ball screw ø15mm, 20mm lead
Guide
Frame-type linear guide
Motor/Screw connection Switch
890 ±0.05
Motor Main parts
Right entry
Without switch and switch rail Photo micro sensor 1 pc., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 2 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor 3 pcs., Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Proximity switch (A contact) 1 pc., (B contact) 2 pcs., Proximity switch rail 1 pc. Photo micro sensor rail 1 pc. Proximity switch rail 1 pc.
Dog fittings for switch are attached to all types except type “Nil”.
Specifications
Performance
Left entry
Power supply voltage
Motor specification G
Stroke
With coupling Photo micro sensor EE-SX674 (Refer to page 93 for details.)
Model
Proximity switch GXL-N12FT (A contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.) Proximity switch GXL-N12FTB (B contact) (Refer to page 92 for details.)
Regenerative absorption unit
Refer to the selection guide below.
Allowable Moment (N⋅m)
Regenerative Absorption Unit Selection Guide
Allowable dynamic moment
Depending on operating conditions, a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor may be required for a non-standard motor with vertical mount specification. How to determine regenerative energy is shown below.
Mounting orientation Model Load movement direction
LTF8
a L1
Mep
L1 (mm)
m
Vertical
Pitching
300 200
a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
2
0
4
6
8
10
(A) and (B) vary depending on each motor and driver. Use of a regenerative absorption unit or regenerative resistor is recommended under any conditions when a vertical specification is used. Contact SMC for questions regarding selections.
Transfer load m (kg)
L3
Mey
L3 (mm)
Vertical
Yawing
300
a
200 a=3000 a=2000 a=1000
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Transfer load m (kg) m : Transfer load (kg) a : Work piece acceleration (mm/s2)
Me : Allowable dynamic moment L : Overhang to work piece center of gravity (mm)
Refer to page 71 for deflection data.
64
Regenerative energy = Motor coil energy consumption + Driver capacitor energy consumption (A) + Regenerative resistor energy consumption (B)
Series LTF8
Non-standard Motor/Vertical Mount Specification
Dimensions/LTF8FNL(X10) Scale: 13%
4-C∗3
60
∗3 D C P
E
61.5
A
Section AA (Sensor mounting dimensions)
12 5
15
D section detail (Sensor rail dimensions)
72
Stroke + 135 Stroke + 219
50 40
5.8 3.3
Body mounting reference plane∗1
19
Pitch = 100
Model
LTF8FNLLTF8FNLLTF8FNLLTF8FNLLTF8FNL-
100K--X10 200K--X10 300K--X10 400K--X10 500K--X10
74
20.5
36
46
Motor unit∗2
Work piece mounting reference plane∗1
Section AA
67.5
Stroke 100 200 300 400 500
1 4 4.9
B: Stroke + 105
(n1-1) x pitch
1 4 5
21.5 31.5
B/2 in case of 500 to 1000 mm strokes
21.5
14.8
A
14
21.5
97.5
2 x n2-M2.6 x 0.45 thread depth 4.5 (Same pos. on opposite)
56
D
7.5
Stroke + 96 (Table movement range)
(25.5)
Photo micro sensor
Proximity sensor
8 5.8 3.3
5 12 (Groove depth 1)
4-M2 x 0.4 thread depth 4
45
∗1. The body and work piece mounting reference planes are to be used as guidelines for equipment mounting. Refer to page 68 for the mounting procedure. ∗2. For the motor dimensions, refer to “Non-standard Motor.” ∗3. For the dimensions of the motor mounting position, refer to the dimensions on page 70 for the guidelines for assembly and designing.
80 46
4.5
4-M6 x 1 thread depth 9
(2 x n1)-ø6.6, Drill through ø13, counter bore depth 6
n1
n2
Model
2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1 1 2
LTF8FNL- 600K--X10 LTF8FNL- 700K--X10 LTF8FNL- 800K--X10 LTF8FNL- 900K--X10 LTF8FNL-1000K--X10
E section detail (Switch rail T-slot dimensions) Stroke 600 700 800 900 1000
n1
n2
7 8 9 10 11
2 2 2 2 2
Positioning Time Guide Positioning time
Positioning time (sec.) Positioning distance (mm)
Speed (mm/s)
1
10
100
500
1000
10
0.6
1.6
10.6
50.6
100.6
100
0.6
0.7
1.6
5.6
10.6
500
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.7
2.7
1000
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.4
1.9
A: Acceleration time B: Constant velocity time C: Deceleration time D: Resting time (0.5 sec.)∗ Maximum acceleration: 3000mm/s2
A
B
C
∗ The value is a guide when SMC's series LC1 controller is used and may vary depending on the driver capacity.
D
∗ Values will vary slightly depending on the operating conditions.
Non-standard Motors: The following motors will be mounted when a motor mounted type is specified. Motor output (W) Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
200
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
200
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
200
Power supply voltage (V AC)
Motor model
Compatible driver model
100/115
MSM021P1B
MSD021P1E
200/230
MSM022P1B
MSD023P1E
100/115 200/230
HC-PQ23B
MR-C20A1 MR-C20A
100/115
SGME-02BF12B
SGDE-02BP
200/230
SGME-02AF12B
SGDE-02AP
Motor dimension (mm) 128 121 136
∗ Refer to pages starting with 89 for driver dimensions, etc. Furthermore, for detailed specifications, etc., contact each motor manufacturer. ∗ For a non-standard motor specification when the motor is mounted before shipping, the driver is included but the cable that connects the motor and driver is optional. Refer to page 66 for part numbers.
65
Series LTF Options Non-standard Motor Cables
Non-standard Motor Driver Regenerative Absorption Unit/Regenerative Resistor
These are cables for connecting non-standard motors and drivers. Cable lengths other than those shown below should be arranged by the customer.
This is a regenerative absorption unit and regenerative resistor for a nonstandard motor. Make a selection providing an allowance beyond the calculated capacity.
Driver
Non-standard motor electric actuators LJ1 and LG1
How to order
LJ1
7
G Compatible model Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
G R Y
How to order
LJ1
1
G R Y
LTF (non-standard motor)
Brake Nil Without brake
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
B
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
Cable length 05
Yasukawa Electric Corporation
Applicable types
G 05 B
Compatible model
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
With brake
Model
Manufacturer part no.
LJ1-7-G
DVO P0820
LJ1-7-R
MR-RB013
LJ1-7-Y
JUSP-RG08
5m
Applicable cables LTF (non-standard motor)
DP9320081-2 (for motor) DP9320089-2 (for encoder)
LJ1-1-Y05B
DP9320083-2 (for motor/brake) DP9320089-2 (for encoder)
∗1 When the Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. motor driver is selected, in addition to the cable, a power connector (MOLEX 5569 – 10R) and an interface connector (Sumitomo/3-M Limited 10126-3000VE) are also required. ∗2 No cable is provided for the Mitsubishi Electric Corporation motor and brake. An electric cable with a sectional area of 0.75 mm2 (600 V vinyl cable) must be procured by the customer. ∗3 When the Yasukawa Electric Corporation motor driver is selected, a digital operator and PC are required for selecting the various parameters.
(195)
LJ1-7-R/Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 85
ø18 ø3.2
ø18
LJ1-1-Y05∗3
100 90 75 5
LJ1-1-R05
LJ1-7-G/Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
30
LJ1-1-G05B
MFMCA0050AEB (for motor) MFECA0050EAB (for encoder) MFMCB0050CET (for brake) (for motor)∗2 MR-JCCBL5M-L (for encoder)
13
LJ1-1-G05∗1
Manufacturer part no. MFMCA0050AEB (for motor) MFECA0050EAB (for encoder)
1
Model
16
35
Please refer to the technical literature of each manufacturer for further details.
101
4.5
110
18
LJ1-7-Y/Yasukawa Electric Corporation
5
160 149
6
ø6
6 50
66
18.5
130
Series LTF Construction Construction
LTF6/LTF8
Parts list No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Description AC servomotor Lead screw Frame-type linear guide Coupling Bearing R Bearing F Housing A Housing B Bearing retainer
Material — — — — — — Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy Carbon steel
Note 100W/200W Ball screw
No.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Description Spacer Bumper bolt Bumper Housing plate Cable clip Photo micro sensor rail Dog fitting for switch Photo micro sensor Connector cable for sensor
Material Stainless steel Alloy steel Resin Mild steel Resin Aluminum alloy Mild steel
Note
Chromate
67
Series LTF Mounting Top Mount
LTF6
2
M5 bolt
2 X n-Mounting hole ø5.5 or M5
h=
100
Mounting hole quantity Stroke
n
Quantity
100
2
4
200
3
6
300
4
8
400
5
10
500
6
12
600
7
14
A
=
(n
-1
30
)X
pi
tc
h
Pitc
LTF8
3.5
M6 bolt
2 X n-Mounting hole ø6.6 or M6
h=
100
Mounting hole quantity Stroke
n
Quantity
Stroke
n
Quantity
100
2
4
600
7
14
200
3
6
700
8
16
300
4
8
800
9
18
400
5
10
900
10
20
500
6
12
1000
11
22
A
=
(n -1
36
)X
pi
tc
h
Pitc
68
Series LTF Non-standard Motor Mounting Dimensions Non-standard Motor Mounting Dimensions
LTF6 Motor mounting area dimensions
Coupling joint holes
Housing
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Matsushita Electric Yasukawa Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Corporation C (Thread size) M3 x 0.5 M4 x 0.7 Effective thread length (mm) 6 8 Quantity 4 2 P.C.D. 45 46 Manufacturer
4-C
PCD
∗ When mounting a coupling on the motor, mount it within the dimensional range shown on the left.
A
Coupling
32.8
Motor
ø26
ø30
ø6
10
A
32 Section AA (Housing interior)
9
Coupling mounting dimensions∗
69
Series LTF Non-standard Motor Mounting Dimensions Non-standard Motor Mounting Dimensions
LTF8 Motor mounting area dimensions
Coupling joint holes
Housing
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Matsushita Electric Yasukawa Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Corporation C (Thread size) M4 x 0.7 M5 x 0.8 Effective thread length (mm) 8 10 Quantity 4 4 P.C.D. 75 70 Manufacturer
4-C
PCD
∗ When mounting a coupling on the motor, mount it within the dimensional range shown on the left.
A
Coupling
Section AA (Housing interior)
Motor
ø34
ø50
ø38
32.8
ø10
13.5
A
37
8
Coupling mounting dimensions∗
70
Series LTF Deflection Data Deflection Data The load and the amount of deflection at load point W are shown in the graphs below for each series.
LTF6 Horizontal
Lateral 10000
100000
Load 100%
Load 100%
1000
Load 50%
Amount of deflection μm
Amount of deflection μm
10000
Load 50%
100
1000
100
10
1
No load
10
No load
0.1
1 100
0.01
Load point distance mm
100
1000
1000
Load point distance mm
LTF8 Horizontal
Lateral 10000
100000
Load 100%
Load 100% Load 50%
Amount of deflection μm
Amount of deflection μm
Load 50%
1000
10000
100
1000
100
10
1
No load
10
No load
0.1
1 100
0.01 1000
Load point distance mm
100
1000
Load point distance mm
w
w
With single end support and table moved to the end of the stroke
Load point distance
Figure 1. Horizontal
Load point distance
Figure 2. Lateral
71
72
Dedicated Controller
Dedicated Controller for Standard AC Servomotor Electric Actuator Teaching Box PC (Not incl. To be provided by customer.)
Controller Setup Software Power supply PLC
Controller Control panel
Driver Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation PLC/ Positioning unit Yasukawa Electric Corporation (Not incl. To be (Used on actuators with provided by non-standard motor) customer.)
Regenerative Absorption Unit (Used for vertical application)
24VDC power supply
To PLC, etc. (Not incl. To be provided by customer.)
Dedicated Controller/LC1 –––——–––––––—–—––– P.73 • Controller setup software –––——–––––––—–—––– P.80 • Dedicated teaching box –––——–––––––—–—––– P.82
Options –––——–––––––—–—––– P.85 Dedicated Regenerative Absorption Unit/LC7R –––——–––––––—–—––– P.86 Non-standard Motor Compatible Drivers –––——–––––––—–—––– P.89
73
Single Axis Type
Series LC1
Controller
Built-in AC Servo Driver Series LTF: Standard Motor Compatible
How to Order
LC1
1 H 2V F 1
Number of axes 1
L 3 Mounting bracket 3 5
1 axis
M3 M5
Mounting∗ Actuator classification H
N: T-nut mounting
Series LTF (Incremental encoder)
L: T-bracket mounting
Applicable actuators Symbol
2H 3H ∗1) 2V ∗2) ∗1) 3V ∗2)
Motor capacity Compatible actuator models
100W 200W 100W 200W
LTF6E- LTF8F- LTF6E-K LTF8F-K
Note 2) Be sure to use a regenerative absorption unit (LC7R-K1A) with this controller (with brake).
Screw lead F H L
6mm 10mm 20mm
∗ This controller includes the accessories listed below. LC1-1- (Either T-nuts or T-brackets for mounting) LC1-1-1000 (Controller connector) LC1-1-2000 (Controller connector) (Refer to page 85.) Note) The following options are necessary for operating and setting the controller.
Power supply 1∗1) 2∗1)
100/110V AC (50/60Hz) 200/220V AC (50/60Hz)
∗1) Consult SMC if the supply voltage for LC1-1HV1 will be 110V AC or more, or the supply voltage for LC1-1HV2 will be 220V AC or more.
74
LC1-1-S1 PC-98 (MS-DOS) LC1-1-W1 (Windows 95 Japanese) LC1-1-W2 (Windows 95 English) and LC1-1-R (dedicated communication cable) (Refer to pages 80, 81, and 85.) or LC1-1-T1- (Teaching box) are required. For ordering information, refer to the option part numbers on page 82.
Controller
Series LC1
Performance/Specifications General specifications Item
Model
Power supply
LC1-1H1
LC1-1H2
100/110V AC ±10%, 50/60Hz (100V AC, 50/60Hz for LC1-1HV1)
200/220V AC ±10%, 50/60Hz (200V AC ±10% for LC1-1H32) (200V AC, 50/60Hz for LC1-1HV2)
Leakage current
5mA or less
Dimensions
80 x 120 x 244mm
Weight
2.2kg
Actuator control Item
Model
Compatible actuator model
LC1-1H2H
LC1-1H3H
LC1-1H2V
LC1-1H3V
LTF6E-
LTF8F-
LTF6E-K
LTF6E-K
100W
200W
100W
200W
5 to 50°C
5 to 40°C
5 to 50°C
5 to 40°C
300VA
640VA
300VA
640VA
Motor capacity Operating temperature range Electric power Control system
AC software servo/PTP control
Position detection system
Incremental encoder
Home position return direction Maximum positioning point setting
Can be selected between the motor side and the side opposite the motor.
Movement command
Absolute and incremental used in combination
Position designation range
0.00mm to 4000.00mm Note)
Speed designation range
1mm/s to 2500mm/s Note)
Acceleration/deceleration designation range
Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration 1mm/s2 to 9800mm/s2 Note)
1008 points (when step designation is actuated)
Note) There are cases in which the position, speed and acceleration designations are not realized, depending on the actuator that is connected and the operating conditions.
Programming Item
Performance/Specifications
Means of programming
Dedicated controller setup software (LC1-1-S1, LC1-1-W1, LC1-1-W2) and dedicated teaching box (LC1-1-T1-) Programming (JOG teaching, direct teaching∗), Operation, Monitor, Test, Alarm reset
Functions Number of programs
8 programs
Number of steps
1016 steps (127 steps x 8 programs)
∗ Direct teaching is only available with LC1-1-W1 and LC1-1-W2.
Operating configuration Performance/Specifications
Item
Operating methods
Operation by PLC, operating panel, etc., via control terminal; Operation by PC (controller setup software); Operation by teaching box
Summary of operations Program batch execution (program designated operation), Step designated execution (position movement, point designated operation) Test run functions
Program test, Step no. designated operation, JOG operation, Input/output operation
Monitor functions
Executed program indication, Input/output monitor
Peripheral device control Item
Performance/Specifications
General purpose input
6 inputs, Photo-coupler insulation, 24V DC, 5mA
General purpose output
6 outputs, Open collector output, 35V DC max., 80mA/output (maximum load current)
Control commands
Output ON/OFF, Input condition wait, Condition jump, Time limit input wait
Safety items Item
Protection functions
Performance/Specifications Over current, Over load, Over speed, Encoder error, Abnormal driver temperature, Abnormal drive power supply, Communication error, Battery error, Abnormal parameter, Limit out
75
Series LC1 Dimensions LC1-1HH
TB power terminal
CN5 motor power line connector (Molex 6P)
CN2 general purpose input/output connector (halfpitch 20P)
CN4 encoder signal line connector (halfpitch 20P)
CN1 control input/output connector (halfpitch 26P)
LINIAR
ACTUATOR
CONSTRUCTION
SYSTEM
90
SMC
38 80
17
29
CONTROLLER
Interface cover
12.5
29
12.5 CN3 communication connector (D-sub 9P)
75
244
Mounting bracket
196
24
With regenerative absorption unit
120
42.5
35.5
23
Indicator light
24
CN6 regenerative absorption unit connector (Molex 2P) TB power terminal
CN5 motor power line connector (Molex 6P)
LC1-1HV
CN2 general purpose input/output connector (halfpitch 20P) CN1 control input/output connector (halfpitch 26P)
CN4
SMC
CN5
LINIAR
ACTUATOR
CONSTRUCTION
90 120
42.5
35.5
Compatibility indicator
23
CN4 encoder signal line connector (halfpitch 20P) Indicator light
SYSTEM
38 80
29
17
19
23
CONTROLLER
CN6
12.5 75
Interface cover
12.5
CN3 communication connector (D-sub 9P) 244
24
76
196
Mounting bracket
24
Controller
Controller Mounting
Series LC1
Part Descriptions
Mounting of the controller is performed by means of the two T-grooves provided on the bottom surface. Mounting is possible from above or below using the special T-nuts or T-brackets. Refer to page 199 for further details.
Encoder signal line connector: CN4 Control input/output connector: CN1 General purpose input/output connector: CN2
Note) This controller comes with either the T-nuts or T-brackets as accessories.
Controller model
Mounting screw
Mounting bracket assembly
LC1-1H-N3
M3 x 0.5
LC1-1-N3
LC1-1H-N5
M5 x 0.8
LC1-1-N5
LC1-1H-L3
M3
LC1-1-L3
LC1-1H-L5
M5
LC1-1-L5
Power terminal: TB
Communication connector: CN3 Motor power line connector: CN5
Mounting with T-nuts
Regenerative absorption unit connector: CN6
Controller Command Setting List Actuator control commands T-nut
Classification Movement Setting
Parameter value
Function
Instruction
Absolute movement command
MOVA
Address (speed)
Incremental movement command
MOVI
± Movement (speed)
Acceleration setting command
ASET
Acceleration
I/O control commands Classification
Function Output ON command
Output control Output OFF command Ma x. 21 8t oM in. 15 8
Input wait
90
Mounting with T-brackets 90
Condition jump
T-bracket
Parameter value
O-SET
General purpose output no.
O-RES General purpose output no.
Output reversal command
O-NOT General purpose output no.
AND input wait command
I-AND
General purpose input no., State
OR input wait command
I-OR
General purpose input no., State
AND input time out jump command
T-AND
General purpose input no., State (P-no.) label
T-OR
General purpose input no., State (P-no.) label
C-AND
General purpose input no., State (P-no.) label
OR input time out subroutine call command
C-OR
General purpose input no., State (P-no.) label
AND input condition jump command
J-AND
General purpose input no., State (P-no.) label
OR input condition jump command
J-OR
General purpose input no., State (P-no.) label
OR input time out Input wait with jump command time out AND input time out function subroutine call command
25 6 25 ±1 5 ± for 1f or L5 L3
Instruction
Program control commands Classification Jump Sub-routine Loop
Parameter value
Function
Instruction
Unconditional jump command
JMP
(P-no.) label
Subroutine call command
CALL
(P-no.) label
Subroutine end declaration
RET
Loop start command
FOR
Loop end command
NEXT
End
Program end declaration
END
Timer
Timer command
TIM
Loop frequency
Timer amount
77
Series LC1 Connection Examples Control Input/Output Terminal: CN1
Control input/output terminal: CN1
Terminal to perform actuator operation (connects PLC and operating panel)
CN1 1
+24V SET-UP
1, 14 2
RUN
15
Pro-no. bit1
17
Pro-no. bit2
5
Pro-no. bit3
18
Common
2
Function
Pin no. Description
15
The positive common of the input terminal.
The terminal that performs setup Starting preparation operations (actuator starting preparation). Starting
The terminal that performs program start.
The terminal that designates the Program program to be executed. Can designate designation 8 types of programs with a total of 3 bits. (Set by the binary system.)
<1>
HOLD
16
STOP
4
ALARM RESET
17
PRO-NO BIT 1
5
BIT 2
18
BIT 3
6
STP-NO BIT 1
6
19
BIT 2
Stp-no. bit2
7
BIT 3
Stp-no. bit3
7
20
BIT 4
Stp-no. bit4
20
Stp-no. bit6
21
Stp-no. bit7
9
HOLD
3
STOP
16
ALARM RESET
4
The terminal that designates the step Step to be executed. Used when executing designation steps (position movement). (Set by the binary system.)
8
BIT 5
21
BIT 6
9
BIT 7
22
Temporary Temporarily stops the program run by means of the ON input. stop
<2>
Emergency stop Performs an emergency stop when (nonlogical input) ON input stops. Alarm release
Releases the alarm being generated by means of the ON input.
10
SET-ON
23
READY
11
BUSY
24
ALARM
12
COM
25
COM
13 26
CN1. Control output terminal list Terminal READY
SET-ON
Pin no. Description 23
10
Function
Indicates ability to perform control System terminal input and communication via the ready signal dedicated communication cable when ON. Start readiness signal
11
Operating signal
Indicates operation in progress when ON. ON when program is being executed and when returning to the home position.
24
Alarm output
When this signal is OFF, an alarm is being generated for the actuator/controller.
1
12, 25
Common
2 12 3 13 4
COM
Input terminal
Rated input voltage: 24V DC Rated input: 5mA
Output terminal
Maximum load voltage: 35V DC Maximum load current: 80mA/output 320mA/COM
CN2
<1>
ALARM
CN1 control terminal
General purpose input/output terminal: CN2
Indicates that the SET-UP operation (start ready operation: return to home position after servo ON) is complete when ON. The state in which the program can be run.
11
BUSY
35V DC max.
RUN
3
19
8
+
SET-UP
Stp-no. bit1
Stp-no. bit5
24V DC
14
CN1. Control input terminal list Terminal
+
The output terminal common.
14
+
COM
NO. 0 NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 3 NO. 4 NO. 5 +
5 15
24V DC
COM
35V DC max.
NO. 0
6 16
NO. 1
7 <2>
17
NO. 2
8 18
NO. 3
9 19
NO. 4
10 20
NO. 5
CN2 control terminal
78
Input terminal
Rated input voltage: 24V DC Rated input: 5mA
Output terminal
Maximum load voltage: 35V DC Maximum load current: 80mA/output
Controller
Series LC1
Control Method/Timing Timing for READY signal generation immediately after turning on power ON OFF
Power
READY ON OFF
Timing for temporary stop during operation HOLD
ON OFF
Speed
V O
BUSY
ON OFF
Max. 100ms
After turning the power on, the internal control power comes on, and after self diagnosis the READY signal goes ON.
Max. 25ms Max. 30ms
Max. 10ms
BUSY-OFF timing is controlled by actuator deceleration.
Timing for home position return ON OFF
SET -UP
BUSY ON OFF V Speed O
ALARM ON -RESET OFF
Max. 5ms Max. 20ms Home position return speed
Max. 15ms Creeping speed
ON OFF
SET ON
Speed
V O
BUSY
ON OFF
ON OFF
Timing for emergency stop during operation STOP
ON OFF
SET -ON
ON OFF
After confirming that the SET-ON signal is ON, the RUN signal should be turned ON. P-NO S-NO
ON OFF
RUN
ON OFF
Selection
Selection should be made before the RUN signal goes ON.
After confirming that the BUSY signal is OFF, the RUN signal should be turned ON.
Max. 10ms
Max. 10ms ALARM ON OFF Speed
V O
BUSY
ON OFF
Max. 10ms BUSY
ON OFF Max. 30ms
Speed
V O
Timing for alarm reset ALARM ON -RESET OFF ALARM
ON OFF
Max. 25ms
BUSY-OFF timing is controlled by actuator deceleration.
Timing for program/step execution SET -ON
Timing for stop by ALARM-RESET during operation
Max. 60ms
Max. 15ms
Response time with respect to controller input signals
Max. 5ms
The following factors exist for delay of response with respect to controller input signals. 1) Scanning delay of the controller input signal 2) Delay by the input signal analysis computation 3) Delay of command analysis processing Factors (1) and (2) above apply to delay with respect to the SET-ON, ALARM-RESET and STOP signals. Factors (1), (2) and (3) above apply to delay with respect to cancellation of the RUN and HOLD signals. When signals are applied to the controller by means of a PLC, the PLC processing delay and the controller input signal scan delay should be considered, and the signal state should be maintained for 50ms or longer. It is recommended that the input signal state be initialized with the response signal to the input signal as a condition.
79
Series LC1
Controller Setup Software LC1-1-W2
Windows/LC1-1-W2 (English) Windows edition controller setup software includes all of the functions of PC-98 (MS-DOS) edition software, and the following functions have also been added. • Direct teaching • Program printing • Batch editing and sending/receiving of all programs • Batch management and multiple saving of parameters and programs
Operating environment Computer
A model with a Pentium 75MHz or faster CPU, and able to fully operate Windows 95.
OS Memory Hard disk
Windows 95 16MB or more 5MB or more of disk space required
• The dedicated communications cable (LC1-1-R) is required when using this software. • This software cannot be used with Windows 3.1.
80
Controller Setup Software
Series LC1
Windows/LC1-1-W2 (English)
Screen example • The contents of this software and the registered product specifications may change without prior notice. • Duplicating, copying or reproducing of this software, in whole or in part, is prohibited without prior consent from SMC. • SMC owns the copyright of this software. • The intellectual property rights and other rights concerning this software are solely owned by SMC. This also applies to any future version upgrades and revised versions of this software. • SMC does not assume any compensatory responsibility for any damage or loss of profit, etc., resulting from the use of this software. • Windows and Microsoft are registered trade marks of Microsoft Corporation. • MS-DOS is a registered trade mark of Microsoft Corporation. • Pentium is a trade mark of Intel Corporation. • PC-98 Series is a registered trade mark of NEC Corporation.
81
Series LC1
Dedicated Teaching Box/LC1-1-T1 How to Order
LC1—1—T1—0 2 Cable length 2 3 4 5
• Interactive input display • Programming with the same language as PC software
2m 3m 4m 5m
Performance/Specifications General specifications
Able to execute operations such as programming and parameter changes, which up until now have been performed from a PC. ∗ The special cable is packed with the teaching box. (2 to 5m)
LC1-1-T1-0 Power supply
Supplied from LC1
Dimensions (mm)
170 x 76 x 20
Weight (g)
158
Case type
Resin case
Display unit
46 x 55mm LCD
Operating unit
Key switches, LED indicators
Cable length
2m, 3m, 4m, 5m
Basic performance Performance/Specifications
LC1 (all models)
Operating temperature range
5 to 50°C
Functions
Programming, Parameter change, Setup, Operation, JOG operation, Monitor, Alarm reset, JOG teaching
Monitor functions
Movement position, Movement speed
Protection functions
Over current, Over load, Over speed, Encoder error, Abnormal driver temperature, Abnormal drive power supply, Communication error, Battery error, Limit out, Abnormal driver parameter, RAM malfunction
Protection function indicator
Alarm code
T
S
O
C
R
A
T N O C
L
P O W E R
c
L
U
L
A
E
T
R
O
R
T
&
C
O
O
N
P
S
T
R
U
C
T
IO
N
S
Y
S
T
E
M
Compatible controller
M
AR
AL
UP
L
R
T
N
W
DO
EN
M O /E DE SC
LD HO/BS
82
Dedicated Teaching Box
Series LC1
Dimensions Communication cable connector
STOP key
LCD screen
46
26
L MODE /ESC
ALARM
UP
DOWN
R
ENT
STOP
11
HOLD /BS
POWER
ACTUATOR & CONSTRUCTION SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
Lc
SMC
55
76
170
Warning light (ALARM) Power indicator light (POWER)
20
Hanger ring
Alarm Code List Alarm code
Alarm
Reset
10
Emergency stop
An emergency stop condition exists or has occurred in the past due to the controller setup software or the CN1 control STOP terminal.
11
Limit switch ON
Limit switch is turned ON.
12
Battery error
The memory backup battery voltage is low. Contact SMC.
13
Communication error
Communication with the controller is interrupted.
14
RAM malfunction
The parameter is damaged.
15
Soft stroke limit
The program is about to exceed the stroke length set by the parameter.
20
Over current
Three times the rated current or more is flowing into the driver unit.
21
Over load
The driver unit continuously received a current exceeding the rated current for a prescribed time or longer.
22
Over speed
The controller exceeded the maximum operational speed.
24
Abnormal driver temperature
A temperature increase of the driver unit activated the temperature sensor.
25
Encoder error
An encoder or actuator cable malfunction has occurred.
26
Abnormal drive current
The driver unit power supply is shut off due to a regeneration problem, etc.
28
Abnormal driver parameter
A driver parameter abnormality in the controller system has occurred.
30
Unsuccessful home position return
Trying to execute a program/step without completing the setup (home position return).
31
No designated speed
No speed designation with MOVA or MOVI, and no prior speed designation found.
32
No jump destination
No label found at the program designated jump destination.
33
Nesting exceeded
Sub-routine nesting (calling a sub-routine from another sub-routine) exceeds 14 levels.
34
No return destination
No return destination found for the RET command operation.
35
Executing FOR
A forbidden command is found between FOR and NEXT.
36
No FOR
NEXT command was executed without executing FOR command.
37
No operation program
Trying to execute a program/step with no commands.
38
Invalid movement command
Trying to execute a command other than MOVA, MOVI, or ASET with a step (position movement) designated operation.
39
Format error
An error is found in the attached value of a command being programmed.
Description
∗ Refer to the Series LC1 instruction manual for alarm details. ∗ Explanation of "Reset" symbols above: : Can be reset by the alarm reset. : Turning OFF the controller power is required for resetting.
83
Series LC1 Key Arrangement and Functions
Mode selection
Controller command
SMC PRO PRA SETUP RUN JOG MON ALM PRO STEP
Mode
Display
Function
Programming mode
PRO
Sets a program.
Parameter input/output mode
PRA
Sets a parameter.
Home position return mode
SETUP
Directs home position return.
Operation mode
RUN
Directs a program operation.
JOG operation mode
JOG
Executes a JOG operation.
Monitor mode
MON
Monitors operating condition.
Alarm reset mode
ALM
Directs alarm code display and clear.
LABEL I - PORTO- PORTLOOP SEC
mm2/s PRO ALM
LABEL mm/s
LC
ACTUATOR & CONSTRUCTION SYSTEM CONTROLLER
Main modes
POWER ALARM
HOLD /BS
STOP
UP
L MODE /ESC
R DOWN
ENT
For the operation of each mode, refer to the product's instruction manual.
Key UP DOWN
Moves upward for item selections. Also used to increase values for data entry. In combination with L/R keys, this key drives the actuator at high speed during a JOG operation. Moves downward for item selections. Also used to decrease values for data entry.
L
Moves to the left for item selections. Also used to move a numerical value place to the left for data entry. It drives the actuator to the end side during a JOG operation.
R
Moves to the right for item selections. Also used to move a numerical value place to the right for data entry. It drives the actuator to the motor side during a JOG operation.
HOLD/BS MODE/ESC STOP ENT
84
Functions
Returns to the previous mode during item selections. It becomes the temporary stop key during actuator operation. Returns to the main mode during item selections. It exits all modes. Becomes the emergency stop key during actuator operation. In combination with the ENT key, it launches JOG teaching and aids program editing. Determines data during item selections. In combination with the STOP key, it launches JOG teaching and aids program editing.
Series LC1
Options
T-nuts and T-brackets for Mounting Be sure to use when mounting the controller. Note) The controller unit includes either T-nuts or T-brackets.
T-brackets
T-nuts M
Model LC1-1-L5 (Weight: 16.0g) M5
Model
LC1-1-L3 (Weight: 15.5g) M3
7.5
17.5
17.5
17.5
(Weight: 10.0g)
18
Model
12
M
LC1-1-N3 LC1-1-N5
7.5
M3 x 0.5
11 20
7.5
21
29
30
M5 x 0.8
Controller Connectors These are connectors 'all halfpitch type' used for CN1 (control input/output) and CN2 (general purpose input/output). Note) The controller unit includes a controller connector for use with CN1 and CN2.
CN2 (General purpose input/output)
CN1 (Control input/output) Controller/LC1
Controller/LC1
PLC
PLC
CN1 CN2
Controller connector (CN1: Control input/output) Model
LC1-1-1000
Controller connector (CN2: General purpose input/output)
10326-52A0-008 Halfpitch hood (26P) Sumitomo/3M Limited 10126-3000VE Halfpitch plug (26P) Sumitomo/3M Limited
Single side wired controller connector (CN1: Control input/output) Model
10320-52A0-008 Halfpitch hood (20P) Sumitomo/3M Limited 10120-3000VE Halfpitch plug (20P) Sumitomo/3M Limited
Single side wired controller connector (CN2: General purpose input/output) Model
LC1-1-1050
LC1-1-2000
Model
LC1-1-2050 0.5m
0.5m Cable is connected to LC1-1-1000.
Cable is connected to LC1-1-2000.
Dedicated Communication Cables These are cables used to connect controllers and PCs. Note) Be aware of the configuration of the connector on the PC when selecting a dedicated communication cable.. Controller/LC1 PC
Dedicated communication cable (halfpitch) (For NEC PC-98 Series) Model
LC1-1-RH
PC
Cable length 02—2m 04—4m 03—3m 05—5m
Cable length: 2 to 5m
Dedicated communication cable (D-sub) (For NEC PC-98 Series) Model
Controller
∗ PC-98 Series is a registered trade mark of NEC Corporation.
LC1-1-RD
Dedicated communication cable (IBM PC/AT compatible computer)
Cable length 02—2m 04—4m 03—3m 05—5m PC
Model
LC1-1-RC
Controller PC
Cable length 02—2m 04—4m 03—3m 05—5m
Controller
Cable length: 2 to 5m Cable length: 2 to 5m
85
Series LC7R Dedicated Regenerative Absorption Unit How to Order Regenerative Absorption Unit
LC7R—K1
A
Connected controller power supply voltage Note 1) 1 2
The regenerative absorption unit absorbs the energy (regenerative energy) that is generated by the motor when it decelerates. It is used to prevent drive power abnormality in the controller.
100V AC (50/60Hz)
Accessory type Nil
Without accessory
S1
Series LC1 connector and contact pin + Regenerative absorption unit connector and contact pin
C1
Series LC1 connection cable (0.5m) Note 2)
200V AC (50/60Hz)
Note 1) Consult SMC if the connected controller power supply voltage will be 110V AC or 220V AC. Note 2) The temperature control output cable length is 1m. Also, the connector cable already has the required contact pin and connector assembled.
Single Option
LC7R—1—
Standard motor vertical mount specification electric actuator
Accessory type S0 S1 C1
Regenerative absorption unit connector and pin Series LC1 connector and pin Series LC1 connection cable (0.5m) Note)
Note) The temperature control output cable length is 1m. Also, the connector cable already has the required contact pin and connector assembled.
Controller
Specifications Model Regeneration method
LC7R-K11A 40W
Regenerative resistance capacity Regenerative absorption unit
Regenerative operation voltage Protective circuit
To PLC, etc.
Danger 1. Contact SMC if the connected controller power supply voltage will be 110V AC or 220V AC, as this may cause fire or malfunction. 2. Secure a distance of 50mm or more between the body and control panel interior or other equipment, as this may cause fire or malfunction. 3. Confirm that there are no problems with terminal polarity, pin numbers, and crimping before connecting, as they may cause damage, malfunction, injuries, or fire. 4. Set up a circuit that shuts off the connected controller main power supply if trouble occurs in the regenerative absorption unit. 5. The regenerative absorption unit (LC7R) is exclusively for use with series LC1 controller connection. Therefore, never connect it to other equipment as this may cause fire or malfunction.
86
180V
External connection method Insulation resistance Mounting
380V
Regenerative voltage input mis-wiring protection Over current protection, Overheating protection (Normally closed, Radiator sensor OFF at 100°C)
Ambient operating temperature Connected controller power voltage
LC7R-K12A
Heat exchange method based on resistance
0 to 40°C 100V AC
200V AC Connector
500V DC, 50MΩ or more DIN rail mount
Regenerative Absorption Unit
Series LC7R
Dimensions
52
35
Operation window
35
96
38
97
Label
22
22
DIN rail holding plate
Connector
Connection Examples • Electrical wire
• Contact pin number
Cover O.D.: Max. 3.1mm (AWG18 to 20) [0.5m or less] Cover O.D.: Max. 3.1mm (AWG18 to 24) [1m or less]
• Temperature control output terminal Maximum rated voltage: 30V Maximum rated current: 6mA Regenerative absorption unit
Controller
Regenerative resistance 2 +
+
–
Regenerative output
P
Main circuit
Input
Max. 6mA 24V DC 5 + Temperature sensor (NC)
6 – Note) Select 6mA or less for resistor R after confirming the input capacity of the control equipment.
• Regenerative absorption unit connectors [Manufacturer: Molex Japan Co., Ltd.]
Part no.
Quantity
Receptacle
5557-06R
1
Female terminal
5556PBTL
6
• Wiring tools [Manufacturer: Molex Japan Co., Ltd.] Wiring tools should be provided by customer.
Description Crimping tool Puller
2
Regenerative absorption unit power input (positive)
Vin (N)
3
Regenerative absorption unit power input (negative)
Vout (P)
1
Extended regenerative resistance output (positive)
Vout (N)
4
Extended regenerative resistance output (negative)
ALM (P)
5
Temperature control output terminal (positive)
ALM (N)
6
Temperature control output terminal (negative)
Terminal Pin no.
Control equipment (PLC, etc. )
Description
Vin (P)
LC1 side connctor pin no.
External Resistor power supply
R
Description
Insertion side
1 2 3 4 5 6
LC7R connection method
3 –
N
Terminal Pin no.
Part no. 57026-5000 (for UL1007) 57027-5000 (for UL1015)
N
1
P
B
Description Regenerative absorption unit power output (negative) Regenerative absorption unit power output (positive)
• Connector: Molex 5258-02 • Pin: Molex 5167PBTL • Crimping tool: JHTR2445A ctor e )
pin d) ct ble nta sem o C as e (pr
n tio
c ne nn ed on e co embl c 1 l 1 LCeass LC cab ) (pr ) 5m (0. (2P
nit nu ptio r o abs ive rat A e n ge 1 Re R-K 7 LC
Re Te g mp (6P ener era ativ ) T tur e m ea pera ec Tem ture bs on orp cont pera tro rol o ture tion l ca u cont tput ble un (neg rol o it c (1m ative utpu on ) t (po ) n ec s r it iv e tor e) ll To (pr tro n) c n ontr ea co tio ol e sse C1 ifica quip mb s L pec men l e e i r al s d) t, et e S tic c. r e (v
57031-6000
87
Series LC7R Brake Wiring Example A wiring example for controller (Series LC1) connectors and a brake is shown below. The brake is in a de-energized condition and locked. 24VDC is required to unlock it. The brake terminal is located in the motor power line connector (CN5), and it is connected to the relay switch inside the controller. By connecting the wiring to this terminal, turning on and off of the brake is controlled by the controller. (The brake does not have polarity.) LC1 (Controller) Control connector: CN1
+24V
1 or 14
STOP 16 EMG (Emergency stop) Switch
Regenerative absorption unit connector: CN6
RY
24V DC (for control terminal) When the AC power supply (100V AC or single phase 200V AC) is shut off, use a relay to shut off 24V DC.
Mount a blanking connector when not connecting a regenerative absorption unit.
Power terminal: TB 1 2
Red White MOTOR
Black Motor power line 3 connector: CN5 Green
RY
Power supply
4 5 6
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue BRAKE Manual unlocking switch for brake
RY
24V DC EMG (Emergency stop) (for brake) Switch
When the AC power supply (100V AC or single phase 200V AC) is shut off, use a relay to shut off 24V DC.
Danger 1. When not connecting a regenerative absorption unit, use a blanking plate to cover CN6, as there is a danger of electrocution or injury.
2. The manual brake unlocking switch unlocks the brake during maintenance or an emergency. Mount the switch when it is necessary for maintenance, etc. Be sure to turn the switch off for purposes other than maintenance, etc. The brake will not operate with the switch on at emergency. 3. If the manual brake unlocking switch is not mounted, the brake cannot be unlocked for an emergency.
88
24V DC ±10% 6W ..... When using 100W motor 8W ..... When using 200W motor • 24VDC power supply: The brake power supply and control terminal power supply are set up separately. • EMG (Emergency stop) device: Use normally closed (B contact) switch. Also, synchronize switches and . • RY (Relay): Rated contact load 24V DC, 1A or more, A contact • Rated brake voltage: • Brake power consumption:
Note) In case of the standard Series LTF product.
Caution 1. A regenerative absorption unit is required depending on actuator operating conditions. Read the instruction manual for the regenerative absorption unit when one is connected.
Non-Standard Motor Compatible Drivers Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Drivers for LTF (For the holding brake wiring, refer to technical information provided by each manufacturer.) Dimensions
ø5.2
168 160
150
Driver
5.2 20
3 105
A
Driver input/output signal list (CN-1/ F connector)
Driver dimensions Driver model MSD013P1E MSD011P1E MSD023P1E MSD021P1E
Pin no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A 35 45 60
Symbol COM+ SRV-ON A-CLR CL GAIN DIV CWL CCWL ALM COIN SP
Signal description Control signal power supply Servo ON input Alarm clear input Counter clear input Gain switching input Command divider switching input CW drive suppression input CCW drive suppression input Servo alarm output Positioning complete signal output Speed monitor signal
Command divider multiplication switching input Alarm clear input CCW drive suppression input CW drive suppression input
Symbol IM COM– GND OZ+ OZ– CZ CW+ CW– CCW+ CCW– FG
Signal description Torque monitor signal Control signal power supply Z phase output Z phase output Z phase output CW pulse input CW pulse input CCW pulse input CCW pulse input Frame ground
With open collector
Example for driver connection between equipment Servo ON input Gain switching input
Pin no. 12 13 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
+ –
CN I/F
GND
1 COM+ Switch ON turns servo ON 2 SRV-ON Switch ON selects secondary gain 5 GAIN
Switch ON selects secondary multiplication 6
3.9kΩ
CW+ 220Ω CW– CCW+ 220Ω CCW– CL
22 23 24 25 4
R Vp 14
Shielding wires
Vp – 1.5 is approx. 10mA R + 220
AM26LS31 equivalent CW pulse input CCW pulse input Deviation counter clear input
3.9kΩ
DIV
Switch ON clears alarm condition 3 A-CLR 8 Switch open suppresses drive CCWL Switch open suppresses drive 7
CWL
Servo alarm output 50mA MAX Positioning complete signal
9
50mA MAX 10
ALM
Shielding
AM26LS31 equivalent
OZ+ OZ+ GND
Z
COIN
19 wires 20 14
AM26LS31 equivalent
Z
VDC 12 to 24V
13 COM–
–
21 (Pin 14 is GND.)
4.7kΩ
+
VDD 30V MAX 15mA MAX
26
–
+
CZ
IM 4.7kΩ
SP
12
Torque monitor: Zout 4.7kΩ
11
Speed monitor: Zout 4.7kΩ
Z
FG
CN I/F
89
Non-standard Motor Compatible Drivers Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Drivers for LTF (For the holding brake wiring, refer to technical information provided by each manufacturer.) Dimensions (RS-232C without optional unit) Driver 40
1-ø5 hole
100 5
5
5
130
120
5
5
5
Driver input/output signal list (CN-1/F connector)
Driver dimensions Driver model MR-C10A MR-C20A MR-C10A1 MR-C20A1
Pin no.
Symbol
Signal description
Pin no.
Symbol
Signal description
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10
V+ ALM PF OP SG NP NG PP PG
Digital output power supply Failure Positioning complete Z phase pulse Interface power supply common Reverse pulse line Reverse pulse line Normal pulse line Normal pulse line
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20
SD SG CR LSN LSP V5 SON OPC V24
Shield Interface power supply common Clear Reverse stroke end Normal stroke end Interface power supply Servo ON Open collector power supply Interface power supply
Example for driver connection between equipment The regenerative resistor is an externally mounted option.
Configure the sequence which shuts off MC with alarm. Power supply Single phase 200V AC (A type) or Single phase 100V AC (A1 type)
NFB
MC
C
L1 L2
The cable length between the controller and servo amp is 2m or less.
P
U V W E
U V W
Servo amp MR-CA or MR-CA1
24VDC
Servomotor HC-PQ SM
Z
CN1 EMG
Servo ON Normal stroke end Reverse stroke end Note 1, 4)
Failure
RA1
24V, 0.2A or more + 24V power supply –
10m or less
19 P5
Note 7)
Shuts off with alarm signal when servo ON is turned OFF.
Note 2)
1 8 7 4 5 9 2 SHD MDR MD MRR MR LG P5
SG
1 7 2 8 4 9 5 SHD MDR MD MRR MR LG P5
11 LG Plate 16 6 17 7 12 20 SD MDR MD MRR MR LG P5
Note 6)
SG ALM LSN LSP SON SG V24 20 2 14 15 17 12 12
Note 3)
SD NG NP PG PP CR SG V+ OP PF 7 10 9 13 12 1 4 3 11 8
CN2
Detector
Be sure to connect the shielding wires to the ground plate inside the connector.
Note 1) Do not orient diodes incorrectly. The amp will fail if connected incorrectly. Note 5)
V+
Note 2) Wiring for a standard cable less than 10m. When the cable length is 10m or longer, four lines each of P5 and LG wires should be connected in parallel. (Maximum 50m) Note 3) Signals having the same description should be connected to the same pin on the connector. Note 4) The failure (ALM) signal is ON under normal conditions when there is no alarm. When it goes OFF (when an alarm is generated), the controller output should be stopped by the sequence program. Note 5) The LSP and LSN signals do not require wiring, because they are automatically turned on internally at the time of shipment. (They can also be validated by parameters.) Note 6) A sequence should be implemented to turn on the RDY relay after confirming that there is no trouble with the servo (ALM signal is ON). Note 7) For motor with electromagnetic brake.
90
Non-standard Motor Compatible Drivers Yasukawa Electric Corporation Drivers for LTF (For the holding brake wiring, refer to technical information provided by each manufacturer.) Dimensions
45
2-ø6
6
A
B
130
Driver input/output signal list (CN-1/F connector )
Driver dimensions Driver model SGDE-01AP SGDE-01BP SGDE-02AP SGDE-02BP
160
149
Driver
A
B
50
55
65
75
Signal description Command pulse input Command pulse input Command code input Command code input Deviation counter clear input Deviation counter clear input Brake interlock signal output Positioning complete signal output 0V External power supply input
Signal PULS ∗PULS SIGN ∗SIGN CLR ∗CLR BK COIN SG P-IN
Pin no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 13
Pin no. 14 15 16 17 18 32 33 34 35 36
Signal S-ON P-ON P-OT N-OT ALMRST PCO SG ALM SG FG
Signal description Servo ON input P actuation input Normal rotation suppression input Reverse rotation suppression input Alarm reset input PG output C phase 0V Servo alarm output 0V Frame ground
Example for driver connection between equipment Single phase 200 to 230V AC +10% –15% (50/60Hz) R 1MCCB
For 100V Single phase 100 to 115V AC +10% –15% (50/60Hz)
T
Noise filter
External noise is prevented by the noise filter Servo malfunction indicator Power supply ON
5Ry
PL 1MC
5Ry
SUP
OFF 1MC 1MC
R
1MC
For power supply switching A surge voltage suppressor should be attached to the electromagnetic contactor and relay.
U V
SGDE servo pack
T
W
1CN PULS ∗PULS SIGN ∗SIGN CLR ∗CLR
Command pulse (maximum 225/kpps) Deviation counter clear signal (active high)
P P P
Note) +12 to 24V 1Ry SV-ON 0V 2Ry P-CON
1Ry ON for servo ON 2Ry ON for proportional control
N-LS open for reverse drive suppression P-LS open for normal drive suppression 3Ry ON for alarm release
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
SGDE servomotor Motor M
3 4
150Ω
Incremental encoder
2CN
13 4.7kΩ 14 5mA
PG
Be sure to treat the shielding wire terminals. Servo ON
N-LS N-OT
16
Proportional control (P actuation) Reverse drive suppression
P-LS P-OT
17
Normal drive suppression
3Ry ALM RST
18
Alarm reset
15
Be sure to ground. Class 3 ground Ground resistor 100Ω or less
30V DC or less 50mA +12 to 24V
5Ry OFF with servo alarm 0V
8Ry ON with positioning complete
5Ry 1ALM ALM-SG
34 35
Servo alarm
8Ry COIN SG-COM
8 10
Positioning complete
4Ry BK
7
4Ry OFF with holding brake actuated
Brake interlock Note) PCO
32
SG
33
C phase output open collector
36
SG 0V FG
Note) 1 The capacity of each output circuit is 30V DC, 50mA or less. 2 The signal input line P indicates a twisted pair wire. 3 The 24V power supply should be arranged by the customer.
91
Switches
Proximity Switches
Applicable switch models Applicable model
Part no.
LTF
Switch type
GXL-N12FT
Standard
N.O. (A contact)
3 wire
GXL-N12FTB
Standard
N.C. (B contact)
3 wire
Switch specifications (SUNX Corporation) GXL-N12FT(B)
Part no.
Direction of detecting axis, Perpendicular to detecting axis: 0.04mm or less
Repeatability Power supply voltage
12 to 24V DC ±10%, Ripple P-P 10% or less
Current consumption
15mA NPN Maximum load current: 100mA Maximum applied voltage: 30V DC Residual voltage: 1V or less (At 100 mA inrush current) 0.4V or less (At 16 mA inrush current)
Output
Maximum response frequency Indicator light
Environmental resistance Detecting distance fluctuation
500Hz Red LED (lights up when ON)
Ambient temperature
–10° to 55°C
Ambient humidity
45 to 85% RH
Noise resistance
Power line: 240Vp, pulse width of 0.5μs
Temperature characteristics Voltage characteristics
Within +15/–10% of detecting distance at 20°C within ambient temperature range Within ±2% with ±10% fluctuation of operating voltage CN-13-C3 (3.8mm 3 wire heavy duty cable 3m)
Cable
Proximity switch internal circuit
Proximity Switch/Dog Fitting for Proximity Switch Mounting
GXL-12FT(B)
Internal circuit
Brown lead wire
Phillips machine screw (Class 1)(M2 x 4) Tightening torque: 0.07±0.01N⋅m
Phillips countersunk machine screw (Class 1)(M2.6 x 5) Tightening torque: 0.16±0.01N⋅m
Dog fitting for proximity switch Output Black lead wire
Blue lead wire
Be sure to use the mounting screws included, and mount the proximity switch as shown in the drawing to the right. Mount the dog fitting for proximity switch as illustrated to the right. Always use the proper tightening torque and use a thread locking agent on screws to prevent loosening.
Proximity switch rail
Square nut
Switch mounting bracket Phillips round head screw (M3 x 9) Tightening torque: 0.29±0.01N⋅m Proximity switch
92
Switches
Photo Micro Sensor
Standard Photo Micro Sensor for Home Position (OMRON Corporation) Rating 5 to 24V DC ±10%, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less
Power supply voltage Current consumption
35mA or less 5 to 24VDC load current (Ic) 100mA, Residual voltage 0.8V or less Load current (Ic) 40mA, Residual voltage 0.4V or less
Control output Ambient temperature
Operation: –25 to 55°C (When stored: –30 to 80°C)
Ambient humidity
Operation: 5 to 85%RH (When stored: 5 to 95%RH) EE-SX674
Part no.
EE-1010
Part no. of connector with code Applicable actuator
LTF
Sensor
Terminal arrangement +
1
1
Brown
Vcc
2
2
White
L∗
3
3
Black
OUTPUT
4
4
Blue
GND (OV)
–
∗ Normally ON when light is blocked. However, if the L terminal and + terminal are shorted, it changes to ON when light enters.
Output level circuit Operating condition of output transistor
ON when light enters
Photo Micro Sensor/ Dog Fitting for Photo Micro Sensor Mounting
ON when light is blocked Phillips countersunk machine screw (Class 1)(M2.6 x 5) Tightening torque: 0.16±0.01N⋅m Brown +
Phillips countersunk machine screw (Class 1)(M2 x 4) Tightening torque: 0.07±0.01N⋅m
Internal circuit
L White
Output circuit
Load
Black output
Dog fitting for photo micro sensor Blue –
∗ Normally ON when light is blocked. However, if the L terminal and + terminal are shorted, it changes to ON when light enters.
("L" and "+" open)
("L" and "+" shorted)
Time chart
Light enters
Light enters
Light blocked Lighted Light ON indicator light (Red) Light Off
Light blocked Lighted Light ON indicator light (Red) Light Off
Output transistor Load 1 (Relay) Load 2
ON OFF Operate Return H L
Output transistor Load 1 (Relay) Load 2
ON OFF Operate
Square nut
Photo micro sensor rail Photo micro sensor Connector cable for sensor Hexagon socket head bolt (M3 x 6) Tightening torque: 0.29±0.01N⋅m
Return H L
Be sure to use the attached mounting screws. Mount the photo micro sensor as illustrated to the right. Mount the dog fitting for photo micro sensor as illustrated to the right. Be sure to observe the prescribed tightening torque. Use special adhesive for screws for locking.
93
Inquiry Sheet Fill out the form and contact the nearest SMC sales office or distributor. Name of customer
Company name Contact person
Dept. Contact telephone/ Telephone fax no.
Fax
Mounting orientation Horizontal, Horizontal wall mount, Horizontal reverse mount, Vertical Work piece load (kg) Stroke (mm) Speed (mm/s) Positioning repeatability (mm)
±0.1, ±0.05, ±0.02 Units required
⇒ Controller
Components Circle components provided by customer.
⇒ Driver
M Motor
• Actuator only • Actuator + Motor • Actuator + Motor + Driver (controller)
Actuator Proceed to
.
Motor/Driver: Yes (Manufacturer: , Part no.: : No –– Proceed to . Controller/Driver selection: a) Controller provided by customer PLC (Manufacturer: , Part no.: Positioning unit (pulse output function): Yes, No b) Driver specifications Power supply: 24V DC, 100V AC, 200V AC International standard compatibility: None, CE, UL c) Motor type: AC servomotor, Stepper motor (2 phase/5 phase), Brushless motor
)
)
Operation pattern Describe in detail.
Speed
Confirm the amount of time in seconds needed to cover the moving distance.
Tact time
Moving distance: _____________mm
Time t = Tact time: _______________s
t
s = Cycle time: ______________s
s Example) Projection distance
z
x
Work piece moment
y Environment 94
x: _________mm y: _________mm z: _________mm
General, Clean room, Mist environment, Dusty environment
Series
LTF
Safety Instructions These safety instructions are intended to prevent a hazardous situation and/or equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard by a label of "Caution", "Warning" or "Danger". To ensure safety, be sure to observe ISO 10218 Note 1), JIS 8433 Note 2) and other safety practices.
Caution: Operator error could result in injury or equipment damage. Warning: Operator error could result in serious injury or loss of life. Danger: In extreme conditions, there is a possible result of serious injury or loss of life. Note 1) ISO 10218: Manipulating industrial robots - Safety Note 2) JIS 8433: General Rules for Robot Safety
Warning 1. The compatibility of electric actuators is the responsibility of the person who designs the system or decides its specifications. Since the products specified here are used in various operating conditions, their compatibility for the specific system must be based on specifications or after analysis and/or tests to meet your specific requirements. The expected performance and safety assurance will be the responsibility of the person who has determined the compatibility of the system. This person should continuously review the suitability of all items specified, referring to the latest catalog information with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of equipment failure when configuring a system.
2. Only trained personnel should operate this equipment. Electric actuators can be dangerous if an operator is unfamiliar with them. Assembly, handling or repair of systems using electric actuators should be performed by trained and experienced operators.
3. Do not service machinery/equipment or attempt to remove components until safety is confirmed. 1. Inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed after confirmation of safe locked-out control positions. 2. When equipment is to be removed, confirm the safety process as mentioned above, and shut off the power supply for this equipment. 3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, confirm that safety measures are in effect.
4. Contact SMC if the product is to be used in any of the following conditions: 1. Conditions and environments beyond the given specifications, or if product is used outdoors. 2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, medical equipment, food and beverages, or safety equipment. 3. An application which has the possibility of having negative effects on people, property or animals, requiring special safety analysis.
95
LTF Electric Actuator Precautions 1 Series
Be sure to read before handling.
Design
Warning
Operation
Caution
1. There is a possibility of dangerous sudden action by actuators if sliding parts of machinery are twisted due to external forces, etc. In such cases, human injury may occur, e.g., by catching hands or feet in the machinery, or damage to the machinery itself may occur. Therefore, the machine should be adjusted for smooth operation and designed to avoid such dangers.
2. A protective cover is recommended to minimize the risk of human injury. If a driven object and moving parts of an actuator pose a danger of human injury, design the structure to avoid contact with the human body.
3. Securely tighten all stationary parts and connected parts of electric actuators so that they will not become loose. Avoid use in locations where direct vibration or impact shock, etc., will be applied to the body of the actuator.
4. In cases where dangerous conditions may result from power failure or malfunction of the product, install safety equipment to prevent damage to machinery and human injury. Consideration must also be given to drop prevention with regard to suspension equipment and lifting mechanisms. 5. Consider possible loss of power sources. Take measures to protect against human injury and machine damage in the event that there is a loss of air pressure, electricity or hydraulic power.
6. Consider emergency stops.
3. Since the bearing parts and parts surrounding the lead screw are adjusted at the time of shipment, do not change the setting of the adjusted parts. 4. The product can be used without lubrication. In case the product is to be lubricated, use lithium grease (JIS 2). 5. If the actuator will be used in an environment where it will be exposed to chips, dust, cutting oil (water, liquids), etc., a cover or other protection should be provided. 6. See to it that no repeated bending stress or stretching force is applied to the motor cable. 7. Since no protective cover is installed on the product, provide an external protective cover protecting the entire product wherever possible. Using the product in an environment where it is exposed to water, liquid coolant or dust such as iron powder will cause an adverse effect to the ball screw and the guide. Therefore, an external cover is also required for dust prevention. 8. Secure the work piece firmly on the top of the table using the four mounting holes. Never use the actuator with the work piece mounted only on one side of the table. 9. If the electric actuator is repeatedly operated for short stroke cycles (20mm for LJ, 10mm for LX), this may cause loss of grease. Therefore, operate the actuator for a full stroke once every scores of cycles.
Design so that human injury and/or damage to machinery and equipment will not be caused when machinery is stopped by a safety device under abnormal conditions such as a power outage or a manual emergency stop.
7. Consider the action when operation is restarted after an emergency stop or abnormal stop. Design the machinery so that human injury or equipment damage will not occur upon restart of operation.
Operation
Caution 1. In order to ensure proper operation, be certain to read the instruction manual carefully. As a rule, handling or usage/operation other than that contained in the instruction manual are prohibited. 2. The actuator can be used with a load directly applied within the allowable range. However, design for an appropriate connecting method and careful alignment are necessary when a load with external support and guide mechanisms is connected. Please note that the reference plane for actuator body mounting should only be used as a guideline to install the body. Never use it as a reference plane to align the entire equipment with external support and guide mechanisms. The longer the stroke is, the larger the variation in the axial center becomes. Therefore, devise a connection method to absorb the variation.
96
Selection
Warning 1. Confirm the specifications. The products in this catalog should not be used outside the range of specifications, as this may cause damage or malfunction, etc. (Refer to specifications.)
Caution 1. The operation of the actuator should be confirmed at a low speed. Operate it at the prescribed speed only after proper operation is confirmed.
LTF Electric Actuator Precautions 2 Series
Be sure to read before handling.
Mounting
Power Supply
1. Do not use until you verify that the equipment can operate properly. 2. The product should be mounted and operated after thoroughly reading the instruction manual and understanding its contents. 3. Do not dent, scratch or cause other damage to the body and table mounting surfaces.
1. In cases where voltage fluctuations greatly exceed the prescribed voltage, a constant voltage transformer, etc., should be used to operate within the prescribed range. 2. Use a power supply that has low noise between lines and between power and ground. In cases where noise is high, an isolation transformer should be used. 3. The power supply line to the controller and the interface power supply line to general input/output and control terminals (24V DC) must be wired separately in different systems. 4. To minimize the voltage drop, use 100/200 V AC and 24 V DC wires with the largest sectional areas possible and keep the wiring length as short as possible. 5. The 100/200 V AC wire must not be bundled with or arranged in close proximity with the input/output lines of control terminals or encoder signal lines. If possible, keep a 100 mm or larger distance from such lines. 6. To prevent surges from lightening, connect a varistor for lightning. Ground the surge absorber for lightning separately from the grounding of the controller.
Caution
Caution
This may cause a loss of parallelism in the mounting surfaces, looseness in the guide unit, an increase in operating resistance or other problems.
4. When attaching a work load, do not apply strong impact shock or a large moment. If an outside force exceeding the allowable moment is applied, this may cause looseness in the guide unit, an increase in sliding resistance or other problems.
5. When connecting a load having an external support or guide mechanism, be sure to select a suitable connection method and perform careful alignment. 6. Take care that cables are not caught by actuator movement. 7. Do not use in locations where there is vibration or impact shock. Contact SMC before using in this kind of environment, as damage may result. 8. Give adequate consideration to the arrangement of wiring, etc., when mounting. If wiring is forced into inappropriate arrangement, this may lead to breaks in the wiring and result in malfunction. 9. Avoid use in the following environments. 1. Locations with a lot of debris or dust, or where chips may enter. 2. Locations where the ambient temperature exceeds the range of 5 to 40°C. 3. Locations where the ambient humidity exceeds the range of 10 to 90%. 4. Locations where corrosive or combustible gases are generated. 5. Locations where strong magnetic or electric fields are generated. 6. Locations where direct vibration or impact shock, etc., will be applied to the actuator unit.
Grounding
Caution 1. Be sure to carry out grounding in order to ensure the noise tolerance of the controller. 2. Dedicated grounding should be used as much as possible. Grounding should be to a type 3 ground. (Ground resistance of 100Ω or less.) 3. Use a wire with a sectional area of 2 mm2 or larger for grounding. Grounding should be as close as possible to the controller, and the ground wires should be as short as possible. 4. In the unlikely event that malfunction is caused by the ground, it may be disconnected.
Operating Environment
Caution 1. Do not use the actuator in an environment where there is possible danger of corrosion. 2. Install a protective cover on the entire product in an environment where a large amount of dust is present or where the product is exposed to water or oil drops. 3. Do not use the actuator in an environment where a strong magnetic field is present.
Maintenance
Warning 1. Perform maintenance according to the procedures indicated in the instruction manual. If handled improperly, malfunction and damage of machinery or equipment may occur.
2. Removal of equipment When equipment is to be removed, first confirm that measures are in place to prevent dropping or runaway of driven objects, etc., and then proceed after shutting off the electric power. When starting up again, proceed with caution after confirming that conditions are safe.
97
Photo Micro Sensor and Proximity Switches Precautions Be sure to read before handling. Refer to the main pages for precautions on respective series.
Operating Environment
Warning
Incorrect Usage
Caution
1. Never use in an atmosphere of explosive gases. The construction of auto switches is not intended to prevent explosion. Never use in an atmosphere with an explosive gas since this may cause a serious explosion.
2. Do not use in an area where a magnetic field is generated. Auto switches will malfunction or magnets inside actuators will become demagnetized.
3. Do not use in an environment where the auto switch will be continually exposed to water.
1. Do not operate beyond the rated voltage range. If applying voltage over the rated voltage range, equipment may be damaged.
2. Avoid incorrect wiring such as polarity of power supply. Otherwise, equipment may be damaged.
3. Do not short circuit the load. (Do not connect to power supply.) Otherwise, equipment may be damaged.
Do not use switches in applications where they will be continually exposed to water splash or spray. Poor insulation or swelling of the potting resin inside switches may cause malfunction.
4. Do not use in an environment with oil or chemicals. Consult SMC if auto switches will be used in an environment with coolant, cleaning solvent, various oils or chemicals. If auto switches are used under these conditions for even a short time, they may be adversely affected by improper insulation, malfunction due to swelling of the potting resin, or hardening of the lead wires.
Brown [Red]
Load
(Load short circuit) +
Sensor Blue [Black]
Black [White]
–
Note) Lead wire colors inside [ ] are those prior to conformity with IEC standards.
5. Do not use in an environment with temperature cycles. Consult SMC if switches are used where there are temperature cycles other than normal air temperature changes, as they may be adversely affected internally.
6. Do not use in an area where surges are generated. When there are units (solenoid type lifter, high frequency induction furnace, motor, etc.) which generate a large amount of surge in the area around actuators with solid state auto switches, this may cause deterioration or damage to the internal circuit elements of the switch. Avoid sources of surge generation and crossed lines.
7. Avoid accumulation of iron waste or close contact with magnetic substances. When a large amount of ferrous waste such as machining chips or spatter is accumulated, or a magnetic substance (something attracted by a magnet) is brought into close proximity with an auto switch actuator, it may cause auto switches to malfunction due to a loss of the magnetic force inside the actuator. 8. Keep the sensor away from splashes of organic solvents, acids, alkalis aromatic hydrocarbons or chloroaliphatic hydrocarbons. Melting may be caused by such chemicals splashed on the sensor, resulting in possible decline of performance.
Other
Warning 1. Consult SMC concerning water resistance, flexibility of lead wires, and usage at welding sites, etc.
98
Other
Caution 1. Power lines and high voltage lines should not be in the same piping or duct with wiring of the photo micro sensor, as the system may malfunction or be damaged due to induction. Separate wiring or individual piping is required to avoid such trouble. 2. If operating with a small induction load such as a relay, wire as shown in the figure below. (In this case, be sure to connect a reverse voltage suppression diode.)
+ OUT –
+V D X Relay
OV
SMC'S GLOBAL MANUFACTURING, DISTRIBUTION AND SERVICE NETWORK
EUROPE AUSTRIA SMC Pneumatik GmbH CZECH SMC Industrial Automation CZ s.r.o. DENMARK SMC Pneumatik A/S FINLAND SMC Pneumatiikka Oy FRANCE SMC Pneumatique SA GERMANY SMC Pneumatik GmbH HUNGARY SMC Ipari Automatizálási Kft. IRELAND SMC Pneumatics (Ireland) Ltd. ITALY SMC Italia S.p.A. LATVIA SMC Pnuematics Latvia SIA NETHERLANDS SMC Pneumatics BV. NORWAY SMC Pneumatics Norway A/S POLAND SMC Industrial Automation Polska Sp.z.o.o. ROMANIA SMC Romania s.r.l. RUSSIA SMC Pneumatik LLC.
SLOVAKIA SMC Priemyselná Automatizáciá, s.r.o. SLOVENIA SMC Industrijska Avtomatika d.o.o. SPAIN/PORTUGAL SMC España, S.A. SWEDEN SMC Pneumatics Sweden AB SWITZERLAND SMC Pneumatik AG. UK SMC Pneumatics (U.K.) Ltd.
NORTH AMERICA
ASIA
SOUTH AMERICA
CHINA SMC (China) Co., Ltd.
ARGENTINA SMC Argentina S.A.
HONG KONG SMC Pneumatics (Hong kong) Ltd. INDIA SMC Pneumatics (India) Pvt. Ltd. INDONESIA PT. SMC Pneumatics Indonesia
BOLIVIA SMC Pneumatics Bolivia S.R.L.
MALAYSIA SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Sdn. Bhd. PHILIPPINES SMC Pneumatics (Philippines), Inc. SINGAPORE SMC Pneumatics (S.E.A.) Pte. Ltd. SOUTH KOREA SMC Pneumatics Korea Co., Ltd.
TAIWAN SMC Pneumatics (Taiwan) Co., Ltd. THAILAND SMC Thailand Ltd.
CANADA SMC Pneumatics (Canada) Ltd. MEXICO SMC Corporation (Mexico) S.A. de C.V. USA SMC Corporation of America
BRAZIL SMC Pneumaticos Do Brazil Ltda. CHILE SMC Pneumatics (Chile) S.A. VENEZUELA SMC Neumatica Venezuela S.A.
OCEANIA AUSTRALIA SMC Pneumatics (Australia) Pty. Ltd. NEW ZEALAND SMC Pneumatics (N.Z.) Ltd.
1-16-4 Shimbashi, Minato-ku, Tokyo 105-8659 JAPAN Tel: 03-3502-2740 Fax: 03-3508-2480 URL http://www.smcworld.com © 2002 SMC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved 1st printing November, 2002 D-DN P-80 (DN) This catalog is printed on recycled paper with concern for the global environment.
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
Printed in Japan.
ɗɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɟ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɵ Ʌɢɧɟɣɧɵɣ ɢ ɥɢɧɟɣɧɨ-ɩɨɜɨɪɨɬɧɵɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ ɫ ɩɨɞɜɢɠɧɨɣ ɤɚɬɭɲɤɨɣ SMAC ɋɟɪɢɹ LAL,LAR,LAS,GRP ɉɪɟɞɧɚɡɧɚɱɟɧɵ ɞɥɹ ɜɵɫɨɤɨɩɪɨɢɡɜɨɞɢɬɟɥɶɧɵɯ ɢɥɢ ɞɟɥɢɤɚɬɧɵɯ ɨɩɟɪɚɰɢɣ ɫ ɧɟɨɛɯɨɞɢɦɨɫɬɶɸ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ ɡɚɤɨɧɨɦ ɞɜɢɠɟɧɢɹ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ. x
ɇɟɡɚɜɢɫɢɦɨɟ ɞɜɭɯɤɨɨɪɞɢɧɚɬɧɨɟ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɫ ɜɵɫɨɤɨɣ ɬɨɱɧɨɫɬɶɸ.
x
Ɂɚɞɚɧɢɟ ɧɟɨɛɯɨɞɢɦɨɝɨ ɡɚɤɨɧɚ ɞɜɢɠɟɧɢɹ (ɫɤɨɪɨɫɬɶ, ɭɫɤɨɪɟɧɢɟ, ɭɫɢɥɢɟ)
x
Ɍɨɱɧɨɫɬɶ ɥɢɧɟɣɧɨɝɨ ɩɨɡɢɰɢɨɧɢɪɨɜɚɧɢɹ 0.1, 0.5, 1 ɥɢ 5 ɦɤɦ
x
Ɍɨɱɧɨɫɬɶ ɭɝɥɨɜɨɝɨ ɩɨɡɢɰɢɨɧɢɪɨɜɚɧɢɹ – 0.007q-0.7q
x
ɉɪɨɝɪɚɦɦɢɪɭɟɦɨɟ ɭɫɢɥɢɟ ɨɬ 0.3 ɞɨ 100ɇ
x
ɉɪɨɝɪɚɦɦɢɪɭɟɦɚɹ ɫɤɨɪɨɫɬɶ ɨɬ 0.005 ɞɨ 1000 ɦɦ/ɫɟɤ
x
ɉɪɨɝɪɚɦɦɢɪɭɟɦɨɟ ɭɫɤɨɪɟɧɢɟ ɨɬ 0 ɞɨ 15G
x
Ɇɚɥɚɹ ɦɚɫɫɚ ɩɨɞɜɢɠɧɵɯ ɱɚɫɬɟɣ ɢ ɜɵɫɨɤɨɟ ɛɵɫɬɪɨɞɟɣɫɬɜɢɟ
x
ȼɫɬɪɨɟɧɧɵɟ ɩɪɟɰɢɡɢɨɧɧɵɟ ɥɢɧɟɣɧɵɟ ɧɚɩɪɚɜɥɹɸɳɢɟ
x
ɋɤɜɨɡɧɨɟ ɨɬɜɟɪɫɬɢɟ ɜ ɲɬɨɤɟ ɞɥɹ ɩɨɞɜɨɞɚ ɫɠɚɬɨɝɨ ɜɨɡɞɭɯɚ ɢɥɢ ɜɚɤɭɭɦɚ
x
Ɍɨɱɧɵɟ ɩɨɫɚɞɨɱɧɵɟ ɪɚɡɦɟɪɵ, ɭɞɨɛɧɵɣ ɦɨɧɬɚɠ
x
ɍɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɧɵɦɢ ɫɪɟɞɫɬɜɚɦɢ ɞɥɹ ɫɟɪɜɨɩɪɢɜɨɞɨɜ
x
ɉɪɢɧɰɢɩ ɞɟɣɫɬɜɢɹ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ ɨɫɧɨɜɚɧ ɧɚ ɮɢɡɢɱɟɫɤɢɯ ɡɚɤɨɧɚɯ ɜɡɚɢɦɨɞɟɣɫɬɜɢɹ ɩɨɥɹ ɩɨɫɬɨɹɧɧɨɝɨ ɦɚɝɧɢɬɚ ɫ ɜɢɬɤɚɦɢ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɨɦɚɝɧɢɬɧɨɣ ɤɚɬɭɲɤɢ, ɱɟɪɟɡ ɤɨɬɨɪɭɸ ɩɪɨɯɨɞɢɬ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɣ ɬɨɤ. ɉɨɞɜɢɠɧɵɣ ɲɬɨɤ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ ɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧ ɧɟɩɨɫɪɟɞɫɬɜɟɧɧɨ ɫ ɤɚɬɭɲɤɨɣ. Ɂɚɤɨɧ ɢɡɦɟɧɟɧɢɹ ɬɨɤɚ ɨɩɪɟɞɟɥɹɟɬ ɡɚɤɨɧ ɞɜɢɠɟɧɢɹ ɧɚɝɪɭɡɤɢ, ɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɧɨɣ ɫɨ ɲɬɨɤɨɦ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ.
ɍɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɨɦ
56
ɗɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɟ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɵ ɉɪɢɦɟɧɟɧɢɟ Ɉɞɧɨɤɨɨɪɞɢɧɚɬɧɵɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ ɦɨɠɟɬ ɢɫɩɨɥɶɡɨɜɚɬɶɫɹ ɜɨ ɜɫɟɯ ɬɪɚɞɢɰɢɨɧɧɵɯ ɩɪɢɥɨɠɟɧɢɹɯ ɞɥɹ ɥɢɧɟɣɧɵɯ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɨɜ, ɧɨ ɨɫɨɛɟɧɧɨ ɷɮɮɟɤɬɢɜɟɧ ɩɪɢ ɧɟɨɛɯɨɞɢɦɨɫɬɢ ɤɨɧɬɪɨɥɹ ɡɚ ɭɫɢɥɢɹɦɢ, ɬɨɱɧɨɝɨ ɪɟɝɭɥɢɪɨɜɚɧɢɹ ɫɤɨɪɨɫɬɢ ɢɥɢ ɩɨɥɨɠɟɧɢɹ, ɜɵɫɨɤɢɯ ɫɤɨɪɨɫɬɹɯ ɩɟɪɟɦɟɳɟɧɢɣ ɢɥɢ ɱɚɫɬɨ ɩɨɜɬɨɪɹɸɳɢɯɫɹ ɰɢɤɥɢɱɟɫɤɢɯ ɞɜɢɠɟɧɢɹɯ, ɬɚɤɢɯ, ɤɚɤ: x
Ɍɨɱɧɚɹ ɢ ɞɟɥɢɤɚɬɧɚɹ ɬɪɚɧɫɩɨɪɬɢɪɨɜɤɚ.
x
ɉɪɨɜɟɪɤɚ ɭɫɢɥɢɣ ɢ ɯɨɞɨɜ.
x
ɉɟɪɮɨɪɚɰɢɹ.
x
ɘɫɬɢɪɨɜɤɚ ɢ ɛɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɚ ɩɨɞɜɢɠɧɵɯ ɩɪɟɰɢɡɢɨɧɧɵɯ ɦɟɯɚɧɢɡɦɨɜ.
Ⱦɜɭɯɤɨɨɪɞɢɧɚɬɧɵɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ ɩɪɟɞɧɚɡɧɚɱɟɧ ɞɥɹ ɬɨɝɨ, ɱɬɨɛɵ ɩɨɞɧɢɦɚɬɶ, ɩɟɪɟɜɨɪɚɱɢɜɚɬɶ ɢ ɭɫɬɚɧɚɜɥɢɜɚɬɶ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɵ, ɧɚɩɪɢɦɟɪ, ɜ ɬɚɤɢɯ ɩɪɨɰɟɫɫɚɯ: x
ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɚ ɩɨɥɭɩɪɨɜɨɞɧɢɤɨɜɵɯ ɤɨɦɩɨɧɟɧɬɨɜ.
x
ɫɛɨɪɤɚ ɦɨɧɬɚɠɧɵɯ ɩɥɚɬ
x
ɩɪɟɰɢɡɢɨɧɧɚɹ ɫɛɨɪɤɚ ɫ ɨɞɧɨɜɪɟɦɟɧɧɵɦ ɤɨɧɬɪɨɥɟɦ ɥɢɧɟɣɧɵɯ ɢ ɭɝɥɨɜɵɯ ɪɚɡɦɟɪɨɜ ɢ ɭɫɢɥɢɣ.
x
Ɍɨɱɧɚɹ ɢ ɞɟɥɢɤɚɬɧɚɹ ɬɪɚɧɫɩɨɪɬɢɪɨɜɤɚ
ɂɫɩɨɥɶɡɨɜɚɧɢɟ 2-ɯ ɤɨɨɪɞɢɧɚɬɧɨɝɨ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ SMAC LAR-50 ɧɚ ɨɩɟɪɚɰɢɢ ɬɪɚɧɫɩɨɪɬɢɪɨɜɤɢ ɤɪɟɦɧɢɟɜɨɣ ɩɨɞɥɨɠɤɢ:
x
ɉɨɞɴɟɦ ɢ ɩɨɜɨɪɨɬ ɩɥɚɫɬɢɧɵ ɧɚ 180q
x
Ɍɨɱɧɵɣ ɤɨɧɬɪɨɥɶ ɭɫɢɥɢɹ ɫ ɬɨɱɧɨɫɬɶɸ 10 ɝɪ
x
Ʉɨɧɬɪɨɥɶ ɫɤɨɪɨɫɬɢ ɢ ɭɫɤɨɪɟɧɢɹ ɪɭɤɢ ɪɨɛɨɬɚ
Ɉɩɟɪɚɰɢɹ ɦɨɧɬɚɠɚ ɂɋ:
57
Ʌɢɧɟɣɧɵɣ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ E-MY2 Ɋɚɡɦɟɪɵ
Ʌɢɧɟɣɧɵɣ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ E-MY2 Ɋɚɡɦɟɪɵ
Ʌɢɧɟɣɧɵɣ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ E-MY2 Ɋɚɡɦɟɪɵ
Ʌɢɧɟɣɧɵɣ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ E-MY2 Ɋɚɡɦɟɪɵ
ɗɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ
LZB/LZC
Ɋɚɡɦɟɪɵ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɨɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ LZB
LZC
ɗɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ
LZB/LZC
Ʉɨɧɬɪɨɥɥɟɪ ɞɥɹ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɨɝɨ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ LC3F2 ɉɪɟɞɧɚɡɧɚɱɟɧ ɞɥɹ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɦ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɨɝɨ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ LZB/LZC x ȼɨɡɦɨɠɧɨɫɬɶ ɪɭɱɧɨɝɨ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ x ȼɨɡɦɨɠɧɨɫɬɶ ɪɟɝɭɥɢɪɨɜɤɢ ɭɫɢɥɢɹ ɩɨɞɚɱɢ x ɍɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɩɪɢ ɩɨɦɨɳɢ ɬɪɟɯ ɜɯɨɞɧɵɯ ɫɢɝɧɚɥɨɜ (ɧɚɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɞɜɢɠɟɧɢɹ, ɪɟɝɭɥɢɪɨɜɤɚ ɧɚɝɪɭɡɤɢ, ȼɄɅ / ȼɕɄɅ)
Ɍɟɯɧɢɱɟɫɤɢɟ ɯɚɪɚɤɬɟɪɢɫɬɢɤɢ ɇɨɦɟɪ ɞɥɹ ɡɚɤɚɡɚ ɂɫɩɨɥɶɡɭɟɬɫɹ ɫ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɨɩɪɢɜɨɞɨɦ ɇɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɟ ɩɢɬɚɧɢɹ ɉɨɬɪɟɛɥɟɧɢɟ ɬɨɤɚ , Ⱥ ɐɜɟɬ ɩɚɧɟɥɢ ȼɯɨɞɧɨɣ ɫɢɝɧɚɥ ȼɵɛɨɪ ɨɫɟɜɨɝɨ ɭɫɢɥɢɹ Ɋɚɛɨɱɚɹ ɬɟɦɩɟɪɚɬɭɪɚ, ºɋ Ɉɬɧɨɫɢɬɟɥɶɧɚɹ ɜɥɚɠɧɨɫɬɶ ɜɨɡɞɭɯɚ, % Ɍɪɟɛɨɜɚɧɢɹ ɤ ɨɤɪɭɠɚɸɳɟɣ ɫɪɟɞɟ
ɋɜɟɬɨɞɢɨɞɧɚɹ ɢɧɞɢɤɚɰɢɹ ȼɟɫ, ɝ
LC3F212-5A3 LC3F212-5A5 LZ3-A3- LZ5-A3- 24 ȼ ɩɨɫɬ. ɬɨɤɚ ±10% ɇɟ ɛɨɥɟɟ 1,3 ɇɟ ɛɨɥɟɟ 2,3 ɋɟɪɵɣ Ƚɨɥɭɛɨɣ Ɉɩɬɨɪɚɡɜɹɡɤɚ, 24 ȼ ɩɨɫɬ. ɬɨɤɚ ±10%, ɧɟ ɛɨɥɟɟ 8ɦȺ ɧɚ 1 ɬɨɱɤɭ 100 % ɢɥɢ ɪɟɝɭɥɢɪɭɟɦɨɟ (ɜ ɞɢɚɩɚɡɨɧɟ ɨɬ 10 ɞɨ 70 %) 5–40 35–85 Ⱦɥɹ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɢ ɜɧɭɬɪɢ ɩɨɦɟɳɟɧɢɹ, ɜ ɦɟɫɬɟ, ɧɟɞɨɫɬɭɩɧɨɦ ɞɥɹ ɩɪɹɦɵɯ ɫɨɥɧɟɱɧɵɯ ɥɭɱɟɣ. ȼɨɡɞɭɯ ɪɚɛɨɱɟɣ ɡɨɧɵ ɧɟ ɞɨɥɠɟɧ ɫɨɞɟɪɠɚɬɶ ɤɨɪɪɨɡɢɨɧɧɨ-ɚɤɬɢɜɧɵɯ ɢɥɢ ɝɨɪɸɱɢɯ ɝɚɡɨɜ, ɦɚɫɥɹɧɨɝɨ ɬɭɦɚɧɚ, ɱɚɫɬɢɰ ɩɵɥɢ ɂɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪ ɩɢɬɚɧɢɹ POWER, ɢɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪ ɧɚɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ ɞɜɢɠɟɧɢɹ A-PHASE, ɢɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪ ɨɬɫɭɬɫɬɜɢɹ ɮɭɧɤɰɢɨɧɢɪɨɜɚɧɢɹ OFF, ɢɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪ ɪɟɝɭɥɢɪɨɜɤɢ ɦɨɦɟɧɬɚ SET 145
ɇɨɦɟɪ ɞɥɹ ɡɚɤɚɡɚ Ʉɨɧɬɪɨɥɥɟɪ LC3F2 Ɉɩɢɫɚɧɢɟ ȼ ɤɨɦɩɥɟɤɬ ɩɨɫɬɚɜɤɢ ɜɯɨɞɹɬ ɨɬɜɟɬɧɵɟ ɱɚɫɬɢ ɪɚɡɴɟɦɨɜ (3 ɲɬ.) ɜ ɪɚɡɨɛɪɚɧɧɨɦ ɜɢɞɟ, ɛɟɡ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɨɜ Ȼɟɡ ɨɬɜɟɬɧɵɯ ɱɚɫɬɟɣ ɪɚɡɴɟɦɨɜ
Ɍɢɩɨɪɚɡɦɟɪ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɨɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ 3 5 LC3F212-5A3Ⱥ
LC3F212-5A5Ⱥ
LC3F212-5A3ȼ
LC3F212-5A5ȼ
ɉɪɢɧɚɞɥɟɠɧɨɫɬɢ (ɡɚɤɚɡɵɜɚɸɬɫɹ ɨɬɞɟɥɶɧɨ) ɇɚɢɦɟɧɨɜɚɧɢɟ Ʉɚɛɟɥɶ ɩɢɬɚɧɢɹ ɜ ɫɛɨɪɟ Ɉɬɜɟɬɧɚɹ ɱɚɫɬɶ ɪɚɡɴɟɦɚ CN2 ɜ ɫɛɨɪɟ ɫ ɤɚɛɟɥɟɦ Ɉɬɜɟɬɧɚɹ ɱɚɫɬɶ ɪɚɡɴɟɦɚ CN3 ɜ ɫɛɨɪɟ ɫ ɤɚɛɟɥɟɦ Ʉɨɦɩɥɟɤɬ ɨɬɜɟɬɧɵɯ ɱɚɫɬɟɣ ɪɚɡɴɟɦɨɜ (3 ɲɬ.) ɜ ɪɚɡɨɛɪɚɧɧɨɦ ɜɢɞɟ, ɛɟɡ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɨɜ
Ⱦɥɢɧɚ ɤɚɛɟɥɹ 1 ɦ LC3F2-1-ɋ1-01-1
ɇɨɦɟɪ ɞɥɹ ɡɚɤɚɡɚ Ⱦɥɢɧɚ ɤɚɛɟɥɹ 2 ɦ LC3F2-1-ɋ1-02-1
LC3F2-1-ɋ2-01-1
LC3F2-1-ɋ2-02-1
–
LC3F2-1-ɋ3-02-1 LC3F2-1-ɋ0
Ⱦɥɢɧɚ ɤɚɛɟɥɹ 5 ɦ – – LC3F2-1-ɋ3-05-1
ɗɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ
LZB/LZC
Ʉɚɛɟɥɶ ɩɢɬɚɧɢɹ (ɨɬɜɟɬɧɚɹ ɱɚɫɬɶ ɪɚɡɴɟɦɚ CN1) Ʉɨɧɬɚɤɬ FG Ɂɟɦɥɹ DC(+) +24 ȼ DC(–) 0 ȼ
ʋ ɤɨɧɬɚɤɬɚ 1 2 3
ɐɜɟɬ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɚ ɀɟɥɬɵɣ/ɡɟɥɟɧɵɣ Ʉɨɪɢɱɧɟɜɵɣ ɋɢɧɢɣ
Ⱦɥɢɧɚ ɤɚɛɟɥɹ
Ɉɬɜɟɬɧɚɹ ɱɚɫɬɶ ɪɚɡɴɟɦɚ CN2 (ɜɯɨɞɧɵɟ ɫɢɝɧɚɥɵ ɫ ɛɥɨɤɚ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ) Ʉɨɧɬɚɤɬ
ȼɯɨɞɧɵɟ ɫɢɝɧɚɥɵ
COM
ɨɛɳɢɣ
ON SET A-PHASE
ON: ɩɭɫɤ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ OFF: ɨɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɚ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ ON: ɪɟɝɭɥɢɪɨɜɤɚ ɧɚɝɪɭɡɤɢ OFF: 100% ɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɟ ɧɚɝɪɭɡɤɢ ON: ɜɬɹɝɢɜɚɧɢɟ (A-PHASE) OFF: ɜɵɞɜɢɠɟɧɢɟ (ȼ-PHASE)
ɨɩɢɫɚɧɢɟ ʋ1 ɛɟɥɵɣ ʋ2 ɤɪɚɫɧɵɣ ʋ3 ɀɟɥɬɵɣ ʋ4 Ɉɪɚɧɠ.
Ⱦɥɢɧɚ ɤɚɛɟɥɹ
Ɉɬɜɟɬɧɚɹ ɱɚɫɬɶ ɪɚɡɴɟɦɚ CN3 (ɜɵɯɨɞɧɵɟ ɫɢɝɧɚɥɵ ɧɚ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɨɩɪɢɜɨɞ) Ʉɨɧɬɚɤɬ OUT A OUT B
ʋ ɤɨɧɬɚɤɬɚ 1 2
ɐɜɟɬ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɚ ɋɢɧɢɣ Ʉɪɚɫɧɵɣ
Ⱦɥɢɧɚ ɤɚɛɟɥɹ
ɂɧɞɢɤɚɰɢɹ ɢ ɧɚɫɬɪɨɣɤɚ
ɗɥɟɦɟɧɬ ɇɚɫɬɪɨɟɱɧɵɣ ɜɢɧɬ
Ɉɛɨɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɟ ɧɚ ɩɚɧɟɥɢ TORQUE
Ɋɟɝɭɥɢɪɨɜɤɚ ɧɚɝɪɭɡɤɢ
POWER
Ƚɨɪɢɬ ɩɪɢ ɧɚɥɢɱɢɢ ɩɢɬɚɧɢɹ Ƚɨɪɢɬ ɩɪɢ ɧɚɥɢɱɢɢ ɜɯɨɞɧɨɝɨ ɫɢɝɧɚɥɚ «A-PHASE» (ɜɨ ɜɪɟɦɹ ɜɬɹɝɢɜɚɧɢɹ ɲɬɨɤɚ) Ƚɨɪɢɬ, ɤɨɝɞɚ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɶ ɧɟ ɪɚɛɨɬɚɟɬ Ƚɨɪɢɬ ɩɪɢ ɩɨɫɬɭɩɥɟɧɢɢ ɜɯɨɞɧɨɝɨ ɫɢɝɧɚɥɚ «SET» (ɜɟɥɢɱɢɧɚ ɧɚɝɪɭɡɤɢ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɥɟɧɚ ɩɪɢ ɩɨɦɨɳɢ ɪɟɝɭɥɢɪɨɜɤɢ) ɇɟ ɝɨɪɢɬ ɩɪɢ 100% ɧɚɝɪɭɡɤɟ ȼɬɹɝɢɜɚɧɢɟ ɲɬɨɤɚ ɉɭɫɤ ɇɚ ɜɵɯɨɞɟ – ɧɚɝɪɭɡɤɚ, ɩɨɥɭɱɟɧɧɚɹ ɜ ɪɟɡɭɥɶɬɚɬɟ ɪɟɝɭɥɢɪɨɜɤɢ
A-PHASE ɂɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪɵ
OFF SET
Ɋɭɱɧɨɟ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɟ (ɤɨɦɚɧɞɚ ɞɟɣɫɬɜɭɟɬ ɩɪɢ ɧɚɠɚɬɨɣ ɤɧɨɩɤɟ)
Ɏɭɧɤɰɢɢ
A-PHASE ON SET
ɗɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɣ ɩɪɢɜɨɞ
LZB/LZC
Ɋɚɡɦɟɪɵ ɤɨɧɬɪɨɥɥɟɪɚ LC3F2 Ɋɚɡɴɟɦ CN2
Ɇ3 (ɨɬɜ. ɞɥɹ ɜɢɧɬɚ ɡɚɡɟɦɥɟɧɢɹ)
Ɂɚɠɢɦ ɡɚɳɢɬɧɨɝɨ ɡɚɡɟɦɥɟɧɢɹ
2 ɨɬɜ. 3,6 ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɨɱɧɵɟ Ⱦɟɬɚɥɢ ɡɚɠɢɦɚ ɡɚɳɢɬɧɨɝɨ ɡɚɡɟɦɥɟɧɢɹ (ɜɯɨɞɹɬ ɜ ɤɨɦɩɥɟɤɬ ɩɨɫɬɚɜɤɢ) Ɂɚɠɢɦɧɨɣ ɜɢɧɬ Ɇ3×4 1 ɲɬ. ɒɚɣɛɚ 3 ɩɪɭɠɢɧɧɚɹ 1 ɲɬ. ɋɬɨɩɨɪɧɚɹ ɡɭɛɱɚɬɚɹ ɲɚɣɛɚ 3 1 ɲɬ.
Ɋɚɡɴɟɦ CN1 Ɋɚɡɴɟɦ CN3
ɗɥɟɤɬɪɨɧɧɵɟ ɞɚɬɱɢɤɢ ɩɨɥɨɠɟɧɢɹ D-M9N / D-M9P / D-M9B Ɍɟɯɧɢɱɟɫɤɢɟ ɯɚɪɚɤɬɟɪɢɫɬɢɤɢ ɇɨɦɟɪ ɞɥɹ ɡɚɤɚɡɚ Ʉɨɥ-ɜɨ ɜɵɜɨɞɨɜ ȼɵɯɨɞ Ɉɛɥɚɫɬɶ ɩɪɢɦɟɧɟɧɢɹ ɇɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɟ ɩɢɬɚɧɢɹ, VDC ɉɨɬɪɟɛɥɟɧɢɟ ɬɨɤɚ, ɦȺ Ɋɚɛɨɱɟɟ ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɟ, VDC. Ɇɚɤɫ. ɬɨɤ, ɦȺ ȼɧɭɬɪ. ɩɚɞɟɧɢɟ ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɹ, ȼ Ɍɨɤ ɩɨɤɨɹ ɂɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪ ɪɚɛɨɱɟɝɨ ɫɨɫɬɨɹɧɢɹ Ɇɚɫɫɚ, ɝ ȼɪɟɦɹ ɫɪɚɛɚɬɵɜɚɧɢɹ, ɦɫ ɍɫɬɨɣɱɢɜɨɫɬɶ ɤ ɭɞɚɪɧɵɦ ɧɚɝɪɭɡɤɚɦ, ɦ/ɫ2 ɗɥɟɤɬɪ. ɩɪɨɱɧɨɫɬɶ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ
D-M9N
3
D-M9P
D-M9B 2
NPN-ɫɬɪɭɤɬɭɪɚ PNP-ɫɬɪɭɤɬɭɪɚ – ɍɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɧɚ ɂɋ, ɪɟɥɟ, ɉɅɄ Ɋɟɥɟ (24 VDC), ɉɅɄ 5, 12, 24 (ɨɬ 4,5 ɞɨ 28) – ɧɟ ɛɨɥɟɟ 10 – ɇɟ ɛɨɥɟɟ 28 – 24 (10~28) ɇɟ ɛɨɥɟɟ 40 2,5~40 ɇɟ ɛɨɥɟɟ 0,8 ɇɟ ɛɨɥɟɟ 4 ɇɟ ɛɨɥɟɟ 100 ɦɤȺ ɩɪɢ 24 VDC ɇɟ ɛɨɥɟɟ 0,8 ɦȺ ɋɜɟɬɨɞɢɨɞɧɵɣ, ɤɪɚɫɧɨɝɨ ɫɜɟɱɟɧɢɹ 8 7 1 1000 1000 VȺɋ ɜ ɬɟɱɟɧɢɟ 1 ɦɢɧ. (ɦɟɠɞɭ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɨɦ ɢ ɤɨɪɩɭɫɨɦ) 0,5ɦ, ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɹ – ɦɚɫɥɨɫɬɨɣɤɢɣ ɜɢɧɢɥ, 2,7×3,2 ɦɦ, ɫɟɱɟɧɢɟ 0,15 Ʉɚɛɟɥɶ ɦɦ2, 3 ɠɢɥɵ (D-M9N ɢ D-M9P), 2 ɠɢɥɵ - D-M9B x Ɋɚɛɨɱɚɹ ɬɟɦɩɟɪɚɬɭɪɚ – ɨɬ -10 ɞɨ +60 ºɋ x ɋɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ – ɧɟ ɦɟɧɟɟ 50 ɆɈɦ ɩɪɢ 500 VDC x ɋɬɟɩɟɧɶ ɡɚɳɢɬɵ IP67 (ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬ IEC529),ɜɨɞɨɧɟɩɪɨɧɢɰɚɟɦɨɫɬɶ JIS C 0920, ɦɚɫɥɨɫɬɨɣɤɨɫɬɶ x ɋɨɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɢɟ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɚɦ ɋȿ
